GIE Elevator Frequency Converter B1 Instruction Manual: Model: 380V Class: 3.7kW To 90kW

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 157

GIE Elevator Frequency Converter B1

Instruction Manual

Model: 380V class: 3.7kW to 90kW

Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an inverter and keep it in a safe,
convenient location for future reference.

Copyright © 2012 Shanghai GIE EM Co., LTD. All Rights Reserved.


G1206016 V1.0 July 10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PREFACE............................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1. SAFETY MESSAGES ......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1. Application............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.2. Installation.............................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.3. Wiring .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.4. Operation................................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.5. Setting Control Switches........................................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.6. Maintenance and Inspection, and Parts Replacement ............................................................................ 1-3
1.1.7. Disposal ................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.1.8. Others..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2. APPLICATION NOTES ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1. Selection................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2. Motor Insulation Checking .................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3. Thermal Protection of the Motor............................................................................................................ 1-4
1.2.4. About Motor Heat and Noise ................................................................................................................. 1-4
1.2.5. Magnetic Contactor Installation ............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.3. LABEL WARNINGS ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4
2. BEFORE USING THE INVERTER .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1. PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2. ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION ............................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3. NAMEPLATE .................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4. MODEL EXPLANATION..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5. EXTERNAL VIEW ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.6. TRANSPORTATION ........................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.7. STORAGE ENVIRONMENT ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
3. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1. INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2. INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT ........................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.3. INSTALLATION ORIENTATION AND SPACING ..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.1. Installation Orientation .......................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.2. Installation Spacing................................................................................................................................ 3-2
3.4. INSTALLATION DIMENSIONS ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
4. WIRING ................................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1. WIRING PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2. STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM ................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.3. MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING ................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.1. Main Circuit Connection Diagram......................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2. Main Circuit Terminal Arrangements .................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.3. Main Circuit Terminal Functions........................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.4. Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes ............................................................................ 4-3
4.3.5. Wiring Precautions................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.4. CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING ............................................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.1. Control Circuit Connection Diagram ..................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.2. Control Circuit Terminal Arrangements................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4.3. Control Circuit Terminal Functions ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.4. Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes ............................................................................ 4-8
4.5. PG CARD ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.1. PG Card Models and Specifications....................................................................................................... 4-8
4.5.2. PG Card Terminal Functions.................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.5.3. Frequency division setting of PG Card output signal ................................................................... 4-13
4.6. SETTING UP SLIDE SWITCHES ........................................................................................................................ 4-13
5. DIGITAL OPERATOR ......................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1. DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY .......................................................................................................................... 5-1

I
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

5.1.1. Drive Mode Indicators ........................................................................................................................... 5-1


5.1.2. Relation of Inverter’s RUN and STOP Indicators .................................................................................. 5-2
5.1.3. Digital Operator Keys ............................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.2. DIGITAL OPERATOR MODES............................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1. Switching Modes.................................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.2. Operation &Monitor............................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.3. Parameters Set ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.4. Parameters Verify ................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.5. Fault History........................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.2.6. Data Transfer .......................................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.7. Keypad Set ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8
6. OPERATION..........................................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1. OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2. TRIAL OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2.1. Inspection and Preparation Prior to Powering On .................................................................................. 6-1
6.2.2. Turning ON Power and Checking .......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3. Preparation before Running the Motor................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.4. Auto-Tuning ........................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.5. Trial Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 6-6
7. PARAMETER TABLES........................................................................................................................................7-1
7.1. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETER TABLES .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2. PARAMETER GROUPS ....................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.3. PARAMETER TABLES ........................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3.1. 00 - System Parameter............................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.3.2. 01 - Speed Command ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.3.3. 02 - Digital Output/Input Parameter....................................................................................................... 7-6
7.3.4. 03 - Analog Output/Input Parameter ...................................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.5. 04 - FOC Torque/Current Control ........................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.6. 05 - Motor Parameter ........................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.3.7. 06 - Protection Parameter ..................................................................................................................... 7-13
7.3.8. 07 - Lift function .................................................................................................................................. 7-16
7.3.9. 09 - Communication Parameter............................................................................................................ 7-19
7.3.10. 10 - Speed Feedback Parameter ........................................................................................................... 7-19
7.3.11. 11-V/F Parameter ................................................................................................................................. 7-21
7.3.12. 12 - Fault Record.................................................................................................................................. 7-22
7.3.13. 13 - RAM Map Parameter .................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.3.14. 14 - User Define Parameter .................................................................................................................. 7-25
8. FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................................................................8-1
8.1. CONTROL SEQUENCE ....................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1. Related Parameters................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2. Operation Sequence................................................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2. INSPECTION RUN ............................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2.1. Related Parameters................................................................................................................................. 8-4
8.2.2. Inspection Run Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3. WEIGHING COMPENSATION ............................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.1. Related Parameters................................................................................................................................. 8-9
8.3.2. Calibration Step of Torque Compesation Value at Start ....................................................................... 8-11
8.3.3. Control Diagram of Weighing Compensation ...................................................................................... 8-12
8.4. ACCELERAION/DECELERATION CHARACTERISTIC ......................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.1. Related parameters ............................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.4.2. Acceleraion/Deceleration Characteristic .............................................................................................. 8-14
8.5. CLOSED-LOOP VECTOR CONTROL .................................................................................................................. 8-14
8.5.1. Related Parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.5.2. Structure of Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)................................................................................... 8-15
8.5.3. ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments ........................................................................................... 8-16
8.5.4. Switch ASR gain and integral time ...................................................................................................... 8-16
8.5.5. Feedforward control ............................................................................................................................. 8-17

II
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.6. BATTERY OPERATION .................................................................................................................................... 8-18


8.6.1. Related parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.7. MAGNETIC POLE POSITION DETECTION ........................................................................................................ 8-19
8.7.1. Related parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.7.2. Magnetic Pole Position Detection ........................................................................................................ 8-19
8.8. MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT ................................................................................................................................ 8-19
8.8.1. Related parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-19
8.8.2. Multi-step speed reference function..................................................................................................... 8-21
8.8.3. Inspection Run Function ...................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.9. MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT ............................................................................................................................ 8-22
8.9.1. Related Parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.9.2. During Run Indicate............................................................................................................................. 8-23
8.9.3. Frequency agreement indicate.............................................................................................................. 8-23
8.9.4. Fault indicate........................................................................................................................................ 8-24
8.9.5. Control signal of Brake ........................................................................................................................ 8-24
8.9.6. Control signal of contactor on the output side; .................................................................................... 8-24
8.9.7. Warn indicate ....................................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.9.8. Ouput current under level indicate ....................................................................................................... 8-24
8.10. ANALOG OUTPUT/INPUT ............................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.10.1. Related parameters............................................................................................................................... 8-24
8.10.2. Analog input diagram........................................................................................................................... 8-28
8.10.3. Analog input bias ................................................................................................................................. 8-29
8.10.4. Analog Output...................................................................................................................................... 8-30
8.10.5. pulse output.......................................................................................................................................... 8-30
8.11. S-CURVE RUNNING SIMULATION CACULATING ............................................................................................... 8-30
8.12. ADDRESS MAPPING........................................................................................................................................ 8-31
8.12.1. RAM mapping ..................................................................................................................................... 8-31
8.12.2. User define mapping ............................................................................................................................ 8-31
9. COMMUNICATION............................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1. DATA FORMAT ................................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.1. Communication Data Frame: ................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2.2. Address (Communication Address): ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2.3. Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters) .......................................................................... 9-1
9.2.4. CRC Check Sum in RTU Mode ............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3. ADDRESS LIST ................................................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.4. EXCEPTION RESPONSE .................................................................................................................................... 9-4
10. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1. TROUBLESHOOTING PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2. BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH TROUBLESHOOTING........................................................................................... 10-1
10.3. IF NO ALARM CODE APPEARS ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR ........................................................................... 10-1
10.3.1. Motor is running abnormally ............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.3.2. Problems with inverter settings............................................................................................................ 10-2
10.4. IF AN ALARM CODE APPEARS ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR ............................................................................ 10-3
10.4.1. Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors..................................................................................................... 10-3
10.4.2. Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions ................................................................................... 10-5
11. INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1. INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................11-1
11.2. DAILY INSPECTION .........................................................................................................................................11-1
11.3. PERIODIC INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................................11-1
11.4. PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ...............................................................................................................................11-2
12. SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1. THREE-PHASE 380 V CLASS ......................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2. COMMON SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................................................ 12-2
13. CONTROL DIAGRAM ...................................................................................................................................... 13-1

III
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

13.1. OBJECTIVE SPEED REFERENCE ...................................................................................................................... 13-1


13.2. SPEED LOOP .................................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.3. SPEED REFERENCE ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3
14. APPENDIX...........................................................................................................................................................14-1
14.1. INVERTER CAPACITY ..................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.2. MOTOR CODE ................................................................................................................................................ 14-2
14.3. MOTER CATEGORY ........................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.4. PARAMETERS THAT CHANGES WITH 01-00 ..................................................................................................... 14-7
14.5. PARAMETERS THAT CHANGES WITH 00-00 ................................................................................................... 14-10
14.6. PARAMETERS THAT CHANGES WITH 05-10 ................................................................................................... 14-11
14.7. BRAKE RESISTORS ....................................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.8. WARRANTY AGREEMENT............................................................................................................................. 14-23
14.9. PRODUCT WARRANTY CARD ....................................................................................................................... 14-24
15. REVISION HISTORY ........................................................................................................................................15-1

IV
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

1. Preface
Thank you for purchasing GIE EFC B1 series inverters.This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable
application of GIE EFC B1 Series inverters. Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect
an inverter and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and
safety information before attempting application. Any doubt, please contact the sales center or customer service center.
The content of the manual was confirmed upon printing. However, our company is committed to continuously
improve the product, and thus reserve the right for changing the product specification, performance and other contents
of the manual. Change will be made without any prior notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use.
1.1. Safety Messages
Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect an inverter. Make sure you understand
all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous
conditions, possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous
conditions, possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and/or substantial property
damage.
Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious consequences. These
safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
1.1.1. Application

EFC B1 is equipment designed to drive Permanent magnet synchronous motors for exclusively controlling
elevating machinery. Do not use it for single-phase motors or for other purposes.
Fire or accident could occur.
EFC B1 may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety.
Though EFC B1is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where serious
accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.
1.1.2. Installation

Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal.


Otherwise fire could occur.
Do not place flammable matter nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
Using an optional DC reactor makes human body easily touch any live parts of inverters. In this case, take
countermeasures such as installing the inverter in a place that easily protects human body from electric shock.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the inverter and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the inverter circuitry.
Do not support the inverter by the front cover during transportation.
Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or
from accumulating on the heat sink.
Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
Do not get on a shipping box.
Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes.
Doing so could cause injuries.

1-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

1.1.3. Wiring

When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)(with overcurrent protection) in
the path of power lines. Use the devices within the recommended current range.
Use wires in the specified size.
Otherwise, fire could occur.
Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause fire.
Install inverters in compliance with the local regulation.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the
voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise fire or an accident could occur.
Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
Generally, control signal wires are not enforced- insulated. If they accidentally touch any live power lines, their
insulation coat may break for any reasons. In such a case, an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines.
Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any live high voltage lines.
Otherwise, an accident or electric shock could occur.

Wire the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W of the inverter, aligning phases each other.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices.
To prevent the motor from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.

1.1.4. Operation

Be sure to install the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the covers while power is applied.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON, a sudden start will occur. Ensure that the Run
command signal is turned OFF in advance.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual, the motor may
rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
In the tuning process of the inverter, no motor torque control for braking of the machinery takes effect.Tune the
inverter for the motor after disconnecting it from the machinery, or after mechanically brakes the machinery. Anyway,
do it after suppressing any dangerous factors.
An accident or injuries could occur.
Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops.
Do not touch the PM motor terminals even when the power has been shut off for a inverter, voltage continues to be
generated at the motor terminals while the motor coasts to stop.
Doing so could cause electric shock.

1-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Do not turn the main circuit power (circuit breaker) ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation.
Doing so could cause failure.
Do not touch the heat sink because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy. Before changing the frequency (speed) setting, check the specifications
of the motor and machinery.
The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means.
Injuries could occur.

1.1.5. Setting Control Switches

Before setting up any internal control switches, turn OFF the power, and wait for more than five minutes.
Further, check that the Digital Operator is unlit, and make sure, using a multimeter or a similar instrument, that the
DC link bus voltage between the terminals P2(P) and N has dropped below a safe voltage(+25 VDC).
Otherwise electric shock could occur.

1.1.6. Maintenance and Inspection, and Parts Replacement

Turn the power OFF and wait for more than five minutes, before starting inspection. Further, check that the Digital
Operator is unlit, and check the DC link bus voltage between the P2(P) and N terminals to be lower than 25 VDC.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
Take off the watch, rings and other metallic matter before starting work.
Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual, the motor may
rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
In the tuning process of the inverter, no motor torque control for braking of the machinery takes effect.Tune the
inverter for the motor after disconnecting it from the machinery, or after mechanically braking the machinery. Anyway,
do it after suppressing any dangerous factors.
An accident or injuries could occur.
1.1.7. Disposal

Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.


Otherwise injuries could occur.
1.1.8. Others

Never attempt to modify the inverter.


Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Restore covers or
shields before operating the inverter and run the inverter according to the instructions described in this manual.
Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply
to all products to which this manual is applicable.
1.2. Application Notes
1.2.1. Selection
1) Drive Capacity
For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than rated output current of the inverter.
2) Starting Torque
The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted to the inverter's overload current rating

1-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

(150% rated current for 60 s, 200% rated current for 10s).


The overload rating for the inverter determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect
lower torque than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger inverter or increase both the
motor and inverter capacity.
1.2.2. Motor Insulation Checking
If the motor is used for the first time, uses again after idling for a long time and upon periodical inspection, the
motor insulation shall be checked, so as to prevent the damage to the inverter because of the insulation failure of the
motor windings. The motor wires must be disconnected from the inverter during the insulation checking. It is
recommended to use the 500V megameter, and the insulating resistance measured shall be larger than 5M .
1.2.3. Thermal Protection of the Motor
If the rating of the motor does not match that of the inverter, especially when the rated power of the inverter is
higher than the rated power of the motor, the relevant motor protection parameters in the inverter shall be adjusted, or
thermal relay shall be mounted to protect the motor.
1.2.4. About Motor Heat and Noise
Since the output voltage of inverter is PWM wave and contains certain harmonic, the temperature rise and noise of
the motor will be higher than that when it runs at industrial frequency.
1.2.5. Magnetic Contactor Installation
Use a magnetic contactor (MC) on the power supply side to ensure that power to the inverter can be completely
shut off when necessary. The MC should be wired so that it opens when a fault output terminal is triggered.
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the power supply side to frequently start and stop the motor. Failure to comply
could result in damage to the inverter.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is mounted in the inverter's output circuit, ensure that both the inverter and the motor
are completely stopped before you turn the MC on or off.
1.3. Label Warnings
Always heed the warning information listed inFig 1-1 in the position shown inFig 1-2.

Fig 1-1 Warning Information

Fig 1-2 The Position of Warning Information

1-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

2. Before Using the Inverter


This chapter explains how to inspect, transport and store the inverter upon receipt.
2.1. Precautions

EFC B1 is equipment designed to drive three phase AC motor for exclusively controlling elevating machinery. Do
not use it for single-phase motors or for other purposes.
Fire or accident could occur.
EFC B1 may not be used for a life-support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety.
Though EFCB1 is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where serious
accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it.
An accident could occur.
2.2. Acceptance Inspection
Unpack the package and check that:
1) An inverter and accessories below are contained in the package.
Tab 2-1 Lists in the Package
Description Inverter Quick Start Guide CD-ROM

Quantity 1 1 1

2) The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing.
3) The inverter is the model you ordered. You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate.
If you have received the wrong model or the inverter does not function properly, contact your supplier.
2.3. Nameplate

Fig 2-1 Nameplate Information

2-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

2.4. Model Explanation


Applicable motor Rated Output
Voltage Class Model
rating(kW) Current (A)
EFC-B-40037A 3.7 kW 8.5
EFC-B-40055A 5.5 kW 13
EFC-B-40075A 7.5 kW 18
EFC-B-40110A 11 kW 25
EFC-B-40150A 15 kW 32
EFC-B-40185A 18.5 kW 38
380V EFC-B-40220A 22 kW 45
EFC-B-40300A 30 kW 60
EFC-B-40370A 37 kW 73
EFC-B-40450A 45KW 91
EFC-B-40550A 55KW 110
EFC-B-40750A 75KW 150
EFC-B-40900A 90KW 176
2.5. External View

Fig 2-2 Outside View of the Inverter


2.6. Transportation
When carrying an inverter, always support its bottom at the front and rear sides with both hands. Do not hold
covers or individual parts only. You may drop the inverter or break it.
2.7. Storage Environment
Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Tab 2-2.
Tab 2-2 Environmental Requirements for Storage
Item Requirements Remark
a) Assuming a comparatively short storage period
(e.g., during transportation or the like).
b) Long-time storage (exceeding three months)
Ambient  25  60
 temperature should be within the range from -10 to
+30 °C to avoid the deterioration of the electrolytic
temperature
capacitors.
c) A location where the inverter is not subject to
abrupt changes in temperature that would result in
the formation of condensation or ice.
Relative
5
 95 
humidity a) If the environment does not satisfy the specified
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, 
requirements use plastic film to seal the inverter
direct sunlight, corrosive or flammable and desiccant, etc.
Atmosphere gases, oil mist, vapor, water drops or b) Maintain the relative humidity to within 70% for
vibration. The atmosphere must contain long-time storage.
only a low level of salt.

If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate.
Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do not connect the inverters to motors or run
the motor.

2-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

3. Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the inverter.
3.1. Installation Precautions

Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal.


Otherwise fire could occur.
Do not place flammable matter nearby.
Doing so could cause fire.
Using an optional DC reactor makes human body easily touch any live parts of inverters. In this case, take
countermeasures such as installing the inverter in a place that easily protects human body from electric shock.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.

Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the inverter and circuit boards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the inverter circuitry.
Do not support the inverter by the front cover during transportation.
Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries.
Prevent lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, metallic chips, or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter
or from accumulating on the heat sink.
Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts.
Doing so could cause fire, an accident or injuries.
Do not get on a shipping box.
Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes.
Doing so could cause injuries.
3.2. Installation Environment
To help prolong the optimum performance life of the inverter, install the inverter in an environmental matching the
specifications followed as Tab 3-1.
Tab 3-1 Installation Environment
Site location Indoors
Ambient temperature
  
10 ~45 (The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause
condensation to form.)
Relative humidity 5%~95% (No condensation)
The inverter must not be exposed to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gas, oil mist,
Surrounding Area vapor or water drops.
The atmosphere must contain only a low level of salt.
Vibration 10Hz f 150Hz 10m/s2
Altitude 1000 m or lower, up to 3000 m with derating (Refer toTab 3-2)

Tab 3-2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude


Altitude Output current derating factor
1000m or lower 1.00
1000 to 1500m 0.97
1500 to 2000m 0.95
2000 to 2500m 0.91
2500 to 3000m 0.88

3-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

3.3. Installation Orientation and Spacing


3.3.1. Installation Orientation
Install the inverter upright as illustrated in Fig 3-1 to maintain proper cooling.

Fig 3-1 Correct Installation Orientation


3.3.2. Installation Spacing
Fig 3-2 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.

Fig 3-2 Correct Installation Spacing

3-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

3.4. Installation Dimensions


Installation dimensions and weights of the inverter are shown in Fig 3-3, Tab 3-3.

Fig 3-3 Dimensions of EFC-B-40037~40900Tab 3-3 Installation Dimensions and Weights of 380v EFC
B1 Inverters
Applicable
Installation Weight
Model motor A(mm) B(mm) H(mm) W(mm) D(mm)
aperture Ø(mm) (kg)
rating(kW)
EFC-B-40037 3.7 139 259 270 150 169 5 3.5
EFC-B-40055 5.5 139 259 270 150 169 5 3.5
EFC-B-40075 7.5 139 259 270 150 169 5 3.5
EFC-B-40110 11 Developing
EFC-B-40150 15 Developing
EFC-B-40185 18.5 200 392.5 405 260 214 6 18
EFC-B-40220 22 200 392.5 405 260 214 6 18
EFC-B-40300 30 200 472 486 308 239 5 28
EFC-B-40370 37 200 472 486 308 239 5 28
EFC-B-40450 45 200 553 575 363 253 8 35
EFC-B-40550 55 200 553 575 363 253 8 38
EFC-B-40750 75 Developing
EFC-B-40900 90 Developing

3-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

4. Wiring
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals.
4.1. Wiring Precautions

When wiring the inverter to the power source, insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)(with overcurrent protection) in
the path of power lines. Use the devices within the recommended current range.
Use wires in the specified size.
Otherwise, fire could occur.
Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors.
Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter's output (secondary) circuit.
Doing so could cause fire.
Install inverters in compliance with the local regulation.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire could occur.
Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the
voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected.
Otherwise fire or an accident could occur.
Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals (U, V, and W).
Doing so could cause fire or an accident.
Generally, control signal wires are not enforced- insulated. If they accidentally touch any live power lines, their
insulation coat may break for any reasons. In such a case, an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines.
Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any live high voltage lines.
Otherwise, an accident or electric shock could occur.

Wire the three-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W of the inverter, aligning phases each other.
Otherwise injuries could occur.
The inverter, motor and wiring generate electric noise. Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices.
To prevent the motor from malfunctioning, implement noise control measures.
Otherwise an accident could occur.

4.2. Standard Connection Diagram


The Standard Connection of the inverter is shown as Fig 4-1.

4-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

 I78 B 
=

r¥  G=8> ¦
V Š [ Z  R <
cG 
 B § b78 V ` Š >[ Z `  = r¥ 
G=?> ¦
!8

ª lY«i¬r­n®r¯°«r±i²n¯r³
ªi´Yµ hsq·¶ ´Yµ:¸
¹ µ ¬œºi»Y¼ µ ¬œº
R
S
T
P1 P2 DB N U
V
W
   ¡M
PE PE



JK8 È~É 
JK8 1 2- 
 

7
È~É 
7  .+ 3-% 
+5 , 6 
!8< C =8>H ` G  9 !ML 9 "#4 (  PG

 
 
!< C =8>H ` G  ; !ML; (1 2 

1 320
!8< C =8>H ` G  N !MLN &  !
dYegfihkj?lnm:eYoYpYhkjMqio !8< C =8>H ` G 
O !MLHO +1 -00 
prqsonhitrpYhujDorviekh . /-%  
w mstYpYhiqixYyuzs{shrhkjDoY|s}  aA<   =8> 

!ML + ,* )  
   Ð ÑÒÏ ÌÌ ÍÒÑ
 aA<   =8> "#) Ð
!MLP ( 
 ÌË ÍÎ ÒÓÑÔ
!MLQ '( &   
< C
` a>H G < = $% 


 B ÊDC 
  "#   
7
 ;
O  R;P O 7

?>E?>H= B?Cb` >HE
 BDC 
c c8  ! 7
!8

< C ==?>@ =FA
<
<
==8G
>H< =
B
S THU V W  VY!X Z [ [ \ ] ^ _ !87 :9
!87 9
G < C
` F< =G < =  J!
Ž ½¿¾ À Á Â Ã Ä ÅHÀ Æ Ç  J!
~

  !8< =?>@ EFA< 
 < ==8G >< =
 ! B BDC
’ ] ” › Š ^rX \ ^ ] ” ›Y\ ] ‰ † [s[ Z „ ‘ \ ] ” ›
ƒŒr„ Z 9HŽ… Y† Z  ] Ž‡ ‘ˆY’ X Z [ [ \ ] ^s‰ Š ‹ Z „ ~

 
dnegf:hkj?lnmieYorpYhkjMqso “„ ”Z X– DZ[ ZL„ „rZ ] X‡ ‰Z Z ZŽk•  Ž  ’Ž ž Ÿ Ž  !8 9
!8 I< C
=?< >H=
G A
< <
= 
=8>H

trostœf:qr|j?orvsekh !8 ;
Žr  ?LŽ ‘ ’ — Žk Ž ˜ R ŽY Ž ‘ ’ !8!
™  Ž ‚ ˜YL š  Ž ˜ ~
 ! ~ 7~O  €L= A B 
‡” ]Š ‘” 9H‘› ŠŠ ]r^Y ‰X Š \ „^ [] ” › X ~

 
RN U ¨ £  ©  \ ] [ Z „ – ” ‡ Z _

“ ” \ ]Y‡ \ „ ‡ † \ [r[ Z „ ‘ \ ] ” › ž Š ] [ „ Š ›r‡ \ „ ‡ † \ [s[ Z „ ‘ \ ] ” › ¢ ‹ \ X [ Z • ™ ‰ ” \ „:‹ \ „ Z X £ ¤ \ Z › • Z •i‹ \ „ Z X


Fig 4-1 Standard Connection Diagram
Note1: Remove the jumper when installing a DC reactor. Models EFC-B-40185 through 40900 come with a built-in DC reactor.
Note2: If the braking resistor is equipped with a thermal relay, use this thermal relay to shut off the inverter power supply in case the braking resistor
overheat occurs.

4-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

4.3. Main Circuit Wiring


4.3.1. Main Circuit Connection Diagram
Figture below shows the main circuit connection diagram.

Fig 4-2 Main Circuit Connection Diagram


4.3.2. Main Circuit Terminal Arrangements
R S T PE P1 P2(P) DB N U V W PE
Note1: model EFC-B-40185 through 40900 include DC reactor. So no P1 and P2 terminals, only P terminal.
4.3.3. Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Symbol Name Functions
R S T Main power inputs Connect the 3-phase input power lines.
U V W Inverter outputs Connect a 3-phase motor
PE Grounding for inverter and motor Grounding for inverter and motor

P1 P2 (P) DC reactor connection Connect a DC reactor (DCR) for improving power factor
P2 (P)  N DC link bus Connect an optional regenerative converter or the equivalent
P2 (P)  DB Braking resistor connection Connect a braking resistor.
4.3.4. Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes
Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Tab4-1.
Tab 4-1 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 380 V Class)
Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Recommended
Model Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Size mm2 Õ Ö Wire Sizes mm2 Õ Ö Wire Type

× 3.33-8.37
12-8 × 4Ø Stranded copper
EFC-B-40037A M5 3.5
Ø 12

only 75 
3.5
× 12-8 ×
12 4 Ø
Stranded copper
EFC-B-40055A M5
3.33-8.37 Ø 
only 75 
3.5
× 12-8 ×
12 4 Ø
Stranded copper
EFC-B-40075A M5
3.33-8.37 Ø 
only 75 
EFC-B-40110A Developing
EFC-B-40150A Developing
10-4 × 10 Ø Stranded copper
EFC-B-40185A M6 5.8
(5.26-21.2)
8

only 75 
10-4 ×
6 16 Ø
Stranded copper
EFC-B-40220A M6 5.8
(5.26-21.2) 
only 75 
× 6-2 ×
6 16 Ø
Stranded copper
EFC-B-40300A M6 5.8
13-33.62 Ø 
only 75 
× 6-2
6 16 Ø
× Stranded copper
EFC-B-40370A M6 5.8
13-33.62 Ø 
only 75 
× 2-0
2 35 Ø
× Stranded copper
EFC-B-40450A M8 13.5
35-53.5Ø 
only 75 
× 2-0
2 35 Ø
× Stranded copper
EFC-B-40550A M8 13.5
35-53.5Ø 
only 75 
EFC-B-40750A Developing

4-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Recommended


Model Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õ
Size mm2 Ö Õ
Wire Sizes mm2 Ö Wire Type

EFC-B-40900A Developing

4.3.5. Wiring Precautions


1) Grounding Terminals PE
Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction. (380 V class: Ground to 10
or less)
Install EFC B1 in compliance with the local regulations.
2) Inverter Output Terminals, U, V, W And Grounding Terminals
A. Connect the three wires of the 3-phase motor to terminals U, V, and W, aligning phases each other.
B. Connect the grounding wire to the grounding terminal (PE).
C. The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50m, when they are connected directly.
D. Do not connect a power factor correcting capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter’s output lines.
E. If the wiring length is long, the stray capacitance between the wires will increase, resulting in an outflow of
the leakage current. It will activate the overcurrent protection, increase the leakage current, or will not
assure the accuracy of the current display. In the worst case, the inverter could be damaged.
F. Do not drive two or more motors by single inverter.
G. Driving 400 V series motor
When a PWM-type inverter is driving a motor surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component
may be superimposed on the inverter output and may be applied to the motor terminals. Particularly if the wiring length
is long, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulationresistance of the motor. Consider any of the following measures.
a) Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage.
b) Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor.
3) DC Reactor Terminals P1/P2
A. Remove the short bar from terminals P1 and P2.
B. Connect a DC reactor (option) to terminals P1 and P2.
C. The wiring length should be 10m or below.
D. Do not remove the short bar installed across P1 and P2 terminals if a DC reactor is not to be used.
4) DC Link Bus Terminals, P2(P) and N
These are provided for the DC link bus powered system. Connect these terminals with terminals P2(P) and N of an
optional regenerative converter or the equivalent.
Ù
5) Main Circuit Power Input Terminals R, S,T (Three-Phase Input) Ú
A. For safety, make sure that the molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or magnetic contactor (MC) is turned off
before wiring the main circuit power input terminals.
B. Connect the main circuit power supply wires (R, S, T) to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or
residual-current-operated protective device (RCD)/earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB), and MC if necessary.
It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each
other.
C. It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted that can be manually activated. This is to allow you
to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency (e.g., when the protective function is
activated) so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems.
6) Braking Resistor Connection Terminals P2(P) DB Û
A. Connect an external braking resistor to terminals P2(P) and DB on the main circuit terminal block.
B. Arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or
route them together in parallel.
C. Never insert a braking resistor between terminals P1 and N, P2(P) and N, P1 and P2(P), DB and N, or P1 and
DB.

4-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

4.4. Control Circuit Wiring


4.4.1. Control Circuit Connection Diagram

à?æç
?å î Þ ?å
 ã ä8å
úý ü ââ àÝ
 „ P… 

ß ç „ P…î Þ ß ç


ú üôû  ááàÝ ß PG
è?éêë8ìí
ð  Ý 0 Dì8ì ë  ð  òñ ÷ Ü8à
ð  Ý 0 Dììë
ð
÷  Ü8Ý
ÿ Þß
ð  Ý 0 Dì8ì ë  ð õÿ åï ð
5)687:9<;=?>@6BA?CB9<;DEA
ð  Ý 0 Dì8ì ë  ð ú üÿ Þ â î
C@D@A)9EF)CB9G;2A@H?6)9
ý þüô ÞÞáÜîî 
I >@F)CB9@D@JBKGLEMB9B9<;2A)N@O
ä8†î  è? é ê è ð æ ú ûù ø Þ â îÝ  ‰Š
‰

ñòø ÷ ÞÞâáîîÝà
Ž
Œ Ž
ä8†î  è? é ê è ð ‰ Š‹

‘

ð! ö÷ õ Þá8îà ˆ Ž

Þ  0 1
ì è   ó ô ÞÜîÝ
ßè  ‡ ì ß ä â ñò ÞÜ8îà
 â
à
 ç à"
 á
å2 30  è  é ê4 4?ê è å8ï
ð ï
ðé ê è é Ýa êè? é    ê è
8
å

ï ð 
# $% & ' &)( * + + , - . / ð  â 

ð ï 

  0 ì€ê   å 
ð
â  ð
ã ä8å ` xzy { | }~ € { ‚ ƒ
ð è ê Ý€ 8êè8 é  
ê è
P
â ï ð  

à S ç
U V * W X * - Y Z?( * + + , - .@[ \ ] * V
d - f n \ .B( , . - f nB, - [ X +B+ * V c , - f n
Pã ä8å

â ç2
^B_ ` a?b ` c d
ð?î 
ð  Ý è?é  ê è
5i687:9<;2=)>@6BA?CB9<;DEA e f ( + * V)( [ * * g ` _`a
FBABFo7 D?NG;2A@HB6)9
â`?b ï` c  d j `<_ ` k d`Bp bq ` c d
V * h * V * - Y * `i_ ` a
ð?î
îï ê  
"Dæ ð?ï
ð
â _ ` T k) m _ ` k Pãà
l
âf - f ï n ð\ .?( , . - f n ( PãÝ 8æ è ì
í é ì
PQ R   

Ý S ç
Y \ c c \ -B[ \ V +
P ã ä8å

" %v t b w b , - + * V h f Y * /

e f , -?Y , V Y X , +B+ * V c , - f n p \ - + V \ nEY , V Y X , +B+ * V c , - f n r ]s, ( + * g l [ f , V@]s, V * ( t u , * n g * gE] , V * (

Fig 4-3 Control Circuit Connection Diagram

4-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

4.4.2. Control Circuit Terminal Arrangements

Fig 4-4 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangements


4.4.3. Control Circuit Terminal Functions

Classification Symbol Name Functions


ON: Run in Forward direction
FWD Forward-Stop Command
OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method
ON: Run in Reverse direction
REV Reverse-Stop Command
OFF: Stop acc. to Stop Method
MI1 Multifunction Digital Input1
MI2 Multifunction Digital Input2 Refer to Pr[02-01] to Pr[02-07] for program
-ing the Multi-function Inputs.
MI3 Multifunction Digital Input 3
ON: the activation current is 8mA.
MI4 Multifunction Digital Input 4
Multifunction OFF: tolerable leakage current is 10 A.
MI5 Multifunction Digital Input 5 When MI7 be pulse input, the input can be
Digital input
MI6 Multifunction Digital Input 6 0~20kHz.
MI7 Multifunction Digital input7 or Pulse input
ON: Enable to run the Inverter
ENA External Enable OFF: The Inverter shuts down its power
output by blocking its PWM output signal.
+24V Digital common (Source) +24V 20mA
Common terminalfor digital input and used
DCM Digital common (Sink)
for SINK mode
Multifunction Pulse output, open collector
Multifunction
DFM Multifunction Pulse output type, 24V 20mA 0~20kHz, refer to
Pulse output
Pr[03-22] for programming
SG+,SG- RS485 RS485 communication
Communication
SGND Grounding terminal for shielded cables
Multi-Function RA Multi-function Relay Output 1 (N.O.) a Resistive Load:
Relay Output RB Multi-function Relay Output 1 (N.C.) b 5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) @240VAC or 24VDC
RC Multi-function Relay Output 1 Common Monitor and output the Inverter operation
status, such as: In Operation, Output Frequ
MRA1 Multi-function Relay Output 2 (N.O.) a -ency Arrived, Overload, etc.

4-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Classification Symbol Name Functions


MRC1 Multi-function Relay Output 2 Common
Maximum 48VDC, 50mA
Refer to Pr[02-13], Pr[02-14], Pr[02-17] for
MO1 Multi-function Transistor Output 1 programming

Multifunction
Transistor Output

MO2 Multi-function Transistor Output 2

MCM Multi-function Transistor Common Max 48Vdc 50mA


+10V Potentiometer Power Supply +10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm)
-10V Potentiometer Power Supply -10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm)
Analog voltage Input

Impedance: 150k
Resolution: 10 bits
AVI
Range: 0 ~ 10VDC = 0 ~ Max. Output
Frequency (Pr[01-01]), Set-up by Pr[03-00]

Analog current Input

Impedance: 236 /2M


Resolution: 10 bits
Analog Input Range: 0 ~ 20mA/0~10V =0 ~ Max. Output
ACI Frequency(Pr[01-01])
Set-up by Pr[03-01], Pr[03-12]
Option Jumper: ACI jumper, factory setting
is 0-20mA

Auxiliary analog voltage input

Impedance: 200k
Resolution: 10 bits
AUI Range: -10 ~ +10VDC =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency(Pr[01-01])
Set-up by Pr[03-02]

ACM Analog control common signal Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM
Analog output meter

Output current 20mA max


Resolution: 10 bits
AFM
Analog Output Range: 0 ~ 10V/0 ~ 20mA
Function: Pr[03-18]

ACM Analog control common signal Common for AVI, ACI, AUI, AFM

4-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 4-5 Circuit Diagram for Digital Inputs

4.4.4. Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes


Tab 4-1 Screw Specifications and Recommended Wire Sizes
Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
AWG mm2 Õ Ö Õ
Sizes AWG mm2 Ö
24--10
CN2 M3.5 13.94 18(0.75)
(0.2047--5.26)
26--18
CN1 M2.5 5.76 20(0.5)
(0.1281--0.8107)
4.5. PG card
4.5.1. PG Card Models and Specifications
PG card models and specifications are listed as Tab 4-2, detailed refer to documentation provided with the PG
card.
Tab 4-2 PG Card Models and Specifications
Model Specifications
PG-LA41 For A, B, Z Line driver input, +5V power supply,Line driver and Open collector output
PG-CA41

For A, B, Z complementary or Open-collector input +12V power supply, Line driver and Oper-collector
output
PG-SA41

For HEIDENHAIN ERN1387 Encoder, A,B,C,D,R 5-phase input +5V power supply, Line driver and
Oper-collector output
PG-EA41
For HEIDENHAIN ECN1313 Encoder, A,B 2-phase input and absolute position input of Endat +5V 
power supply, Line driver and Oper-collector output
PG-RA41 Resolver input, Line driver and Oper-collector output
4.5.2. PG Card Terminal Functions
Û
a PG-LA41
The terminal functions of PG-LA41 are listed in Tab 4-3. Wire sizes and torque specifications are listed in Tab 4-4.
The wiring diagram of PG-LA41 and PG is drawn in Fig 4-6.
Tab 4-3 PG-LA41 Terminal Functions
’?“ ” •<–—@˜?™ šE› •@œ@)™ žEŸE—B E¡?–2 —£¢?“@¤ :”)–¥B¡B–2:—

+5V PG power supply: +5V±5% 200mA


GND PG power supply ground
A+ ¦ A- PG input signal A+ ¦ A-
J5 PG Signal Input
B+ ¦ B- PG input signal B+ ¦ B-
Z+ ¦ Z- PG input signal Z+ ¦ Z-
PE Shielding ground
J2 ¦ J3 Monitor Signal PAO+ ¦ PAO-; Pulse output A, matching RS422 standard

4-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

’?“ ” •<–—@˜?™ šE› •@œ@)™ žEŸE—B E¡?–2 —£¢?“@¤ :”)–¥B¡B–2:—

Output PBO+ ¦ PBO-; Pulse output B, matching RS422 standard


PZO+ ¦ PZO-; Pulse output Z, matching RS422 standard
PAO ¦ PBO ¦ PZO § Pulse output A ¦ B ¦ C, open-collector output
DCM Pulse output Signals ground

Tab 4-4 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications


Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size AWG Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õ
mm2 Ö Õ
Sizes AWG mm2 Ö
J5 M2 1.96 28~14(0.08--2.08) 24(0.25)
J2 ¦ J3 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)

Fig 4-6 The wiring diagram of PG card PG-LA41 and PG with line driver outputs

Û
b PG-CA41
The terminal functions of PG-CA41 are listed in Tab 4-5. Wire sizes and torque specifications are listed in.Tab 4-6
The wiring diagram of PG-CA41 and PG is drawn in Fig 4-7.

Tab 4-5 PG-CA41 Terminal Functions


’?“ ” •o–—@˜?™ šE› •@œ@)™ žEŸE—B E¡?–2 —£¢?“@¤ :”)–¥B¡B–2:—

+12V PG power supply: +12V±5% 200mA


GND PG power supply common
A PG input signal A
J5 PG Signal Input
B PG input signal B
Z PG input signal Z
PE Shielding ground

PAO ¦ PBO ¦ PZO § Pulse output A ¦ B ¦ C, open-collector output


PAO+ ¦ PAO- Pulse output A, matching RS422 standard
Monitor Signal
J2 ¦ J3 PBO+ ¦ PBO- Pulse output B, matching RS422 standard
Output
PZO+ ¦ PZO- Pulse output Z, matching RS422 standard
DCM Signals ground

4-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Tab 4-6 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications


Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size AWG Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õ
mm2 Ö Sizes AWG mm2Õ Ö
J2 ¦ J3 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)
J5 M2 1.96 28~14(0.08--2.08) 24(0.25)

Fig 4-7 The wiring diagram of PG card PG-OC41 and PG with line driver outputs
Û
c PG-RA41
The terminal functions of PG-RA41 are listed in Tab 4-7. Wire sizes and torque specifications are listed in Tab 4-8.
The wiring diagram of PG-RA41 and PG is drawn inFig 4-8.

Tab 4-7 PG-RA41 Terminal Functions


Terminal Block Symbol Functions
R1 ¦ R2 Encoder excitation inputs
S1 ¦ S2 ¦ S3 ¦ S4 Encoder sin/cos signal outputs
J4
KTY+ ¦ KTY- Tempreture protection signal
PE Shield ground
PAO ¦ PBO ¦ PZO Pulse output A ¦ B ¦ C, open-collector output
PAO+ ¦ PAO- Pulse output A, matching RS422 standard
J3 J6 PBO+ ¦ PBO- Pulse output B, matching RS422 standard
PZO+ ¦ PZO- Pulse output Z, matching RS422 standard
DCM Signals ground

Tab 4-8 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications


Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size AWG Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õ
mm2 Ö Sizes AWG mm2Õ Ö
J3 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)
J4 M2 1.96 28~14(0.08--2.08) 24(0.25)
J6 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)

4-10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 4-8 The wiring diagram of PG-RA41 and resolver


Û
d PG-EA41
The terminal functions of PG-EA41 are listed in Tab 4-9. Wire sizes and torque specifications are listed in Tab
4-10. The wiring diagram of PG-EA41 and PG is drawn in Fig 4-9.
Tab 4-9 PG-EA41 Terminal Functions
Terminal Block Symbol Functions
+5V Power supply ¨ +5V © 5%
GND Ground
A+ Û A- Encoder input ª SIN/COS signal
J4 B+ Û B- Encoder input ª SIN/COS signal
CLK+ Û CLK- Clock signal
DATA+ Û DATA- Communication signal
PE Shield ground
PAO Û PBO Û
Pulse output A B, open-collector output
PAO+ ¦ PAO- Pulse output A, matching RS422 standard
J2
PBO+ ¦ PBO- Pulse output B, matching RS422 standard
DCM Signals ground

Tab 4-10 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications


Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size AWG Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õ mm2 Ö Õ
Sizes AWG mm2 Ö
J2 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)
J4 M2 1.96 28~14(0.08--2.08) 24(0.25)

4-11
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 4-9 The wiring diagram of PG card PG-EA41 and ECN1313


Û
e PG-SA41
The terminal functions of PG-SA41 are listed in Tab 4-11. Wire sizes and torque specifications are listed in Tab
4-12. The wiring diagram of PG-SA41 and PG is drawn in Fig 4-10.
Tab 4-11 PG-SA41 Terminal Functions
Terminal Block Symbol Functions
1 A- 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
2 A+ 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
3 B- 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
4 B+ 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
5 C- 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
6 C+ 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
J6 7 D- 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
8 D+ 
Encoder input SIN/COS signal
9 R- Encoder input
10 R+ Encoder input
11 +5V Power supply « +5V ¬ 5% 200mA
12 GND Power ground
13 PE Shield ground
PAO ¦ PBO ¦ PZO; - Pulse output A ¦ B ¦ C, open-collector output
PAO+ ¦ PAO- Pulse output A, matching RS422 standard
J3/J4 PBO+ ¦ PBO- Pulse output B, matching RS422 standard
PZO+ ¦ PZO- Pulse output Z, matching RS422 standard
DCM Signals ground

Tab 4-12 Wire Sizes and Torque Specifications


Terminal Tightening Permissible Wire Size AWG Recommended Wire
Terminal Screw
Size
Torque
(kgf.cm)
Õmm2 Ö Sizes AWG mm2 Õ Ö
J3 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)
J4 M2 1.99 30~16(0.0507--1.318) 24(0.25)
J6 M2 1.96 28~14(0.08--2.08) 24(0.25)

4-12
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 4-10 The wiring diagram of PG-SA41 and ERN1387


4.5.3. Frequency division setting of PG Card output signal
The frequency of the output monitor signal of PG-LA41, PG-CA41, PG-SA41and PG-EA41 can be divided by
setting switch array SW1 on the PG card, according to Tab 4-13 SW1 state and Frequency coefficient.

Tab 4-13 SW1 state and Frequency coefficient


SW1:bit2 SW1:bit1 SW1:bit0 Frequency coefficient
OFF OFF OFF 1
OFF OFF ON 2
OFF ON OFF 4
OFF ON ON 8
ON OFF OFF 16
ON OFF ON 32
ON ON OFF 64
ON ON ON 128
Note: SW1 is a switch array consistted of 4 independent switchs, and labeled as follows:

Fig 4-11 SW1 switch


4.6. Setting up Slide Switches
To switch the slide switches, remove the front covers, so that you can access the control PCB that contains the
switches.
Tab 4-14 lists function of each slide switch.

4-13
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Tab 4-14 Function of Each Slide Switch


Switch Function
RS485 matching resistor switch
J2 a) 120 Ohm matching resistor : J2 to ON
b) NO 120 Ohm matching resistor : J2 to OFF
Anlog Current /Voltage Input Jumper
Switches service mode of the terminal ACI for current or voltage input.
J5
a) Current input, switch ACI Jumper to 0-20mA;
b) Voltage input, switch ACI Jumper to 0~10V.
Sink/Source Jumper
Switches service mode of the digital input terminals for SINK or SOURCE.
J6
a) To serve as a switch J6 to +24V.
b) To serve as a current source, switch J6 to DCM.

Fig 4-12 shows location of the configuration slide switches.

ÓÔÕ ÆÎ
ÏÐ µ¶· ´
µ¶· Ö
¸¹º
¼ ìíÉ
¸» ´
êë
½¾¿ Ö
à êë
ÀÁÂ
Ä çèé
ÇË


åæ
Ç
 ÈÌ
µ
ÄÉ
âä
áâã
×Þà
îðï<ñiò óðô)õ ÄÉÍ
×Þß
ÄÉÎ
¿Ý
ÄÉÊ ÛÜ
Ä
ÇÈ ×ÙÚ
×Ø
Ñ ÄÅÆ Ò

  ­³

­±
²

ú
öù
 ø üù öþ ®­


úû ý
ö ÷
ö÷ °­±
¯
®°­
¯ °

Fig 4-12 Location of the Slide Switches

4-14
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

5. Digital Operator
This chapter describes Digital Operator OP-CC01 displays and functions
Use the digital operator to enter run and stop commands, display data, edit parameters, as well as display fault and
alarm information.
5.1. Digital Operator Display
The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below.

Fig 5-1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions


5.1.1. Drive Mode Indicators
The indicators of the status line of the LCD are shown in below.

Fig 5-2 Contents of Drive Mode Indicators


The following table shows the relationship among the indictors on the Function Number, Fwd, Rev and Jog status.
Tab 5-1 the Relationship among the inverter Mode Indicators on the LCD
Indicator Status Conditions
Function Number Always 
Indicate the current function please refer to the switching modes part of the operator.
On The forward run command is input.
Fwd Off The reverse run command is input and the inverter is stop, or the inverter is running reverse.
Blinking The reverse run command is input but the inverter is running forward.
Rev On The reverse run command is input.
Off The forward run command is input and the inverter is stop, or the inverter is running forward.

5-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Indicator Status Conditions


Blinking The forward run command is input but the inverter is running reverse.
On The inverter is jogging.
Jog
Off The inverter is not jogging.
5.1.2. Relation of Inverter’s RUN and STOP Indicators
Tab 5-2 Relation of Inverter’s RUN and STOP Indicators
RUN Indicator STOP Indicator Conditions
Power supply is shut down.

The inverter is running and no stop command is issued.

The inverter is running but the stop command is issued.

The inverter is stop and no run command is issued.

The inverter is stop but the run command is issued.

Note: Lit Blinking Not lit


5.1.3. Digital Operator Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Tab 5-3.
Tab 5-3 Key Functions
Key Name Function
Switches between operation via the Digital Operator (LOCAL) and control circuit
PU Key
terminal operation (REMOTE).

Enable jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator.
JOG Key
The key must be cooperated with the PU key.

FWD/REV Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the
Key Digital Operator. The key must be cooperated with the PU key.

Increment Key Used to move to the next item or data.

Pressed to enter menu items, parameters, and set values.


ENTER Key
Also used to switch from one display to another.

Decrement Key Used to move to the previous item or data.

ESC Key Returns to the status before the ENTER Key was pressed.

Shift/RESET Sets the number of digits for parameter settings.


Key Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred.

MENU Key Selects menu items (modes).

Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital
RUN Key
Operator. The key must be cooperated with the PU key.
Stops the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital
STOP Key
Operator. The key must be cooperated with the PU key.

5.2. Digital Operator Modes


The Digital Operator can run in 6 modes as shown in Tab 5-4.

5-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Tab 5-4 Modes


Mode Primary function(s)
Operation &Monitor Set the frequency and monitor the frequency, current etc
Parameters Set Read and set all the parameters of the inverter
Parameters Verify Read the parameters the current value is different to the default value
Fault History Read the fault history and the inverter status when the last fault happened
Data Transfer Upload and download the parameters between the inverter and the operator
Keypad Set Set the parameters about the operator
5.2.1. Switching Modes
The main menu display will appear when the digital operator is powered on. When the MENU Key is pressed, the
next mode display will appear. Also the mode can be switched by the Increment Key and the Decrement Key. Press the
ENTER Key to enter the mode, press the MENU Key to go back to the main menu.

Fig 5-3 Switching Modes


5.2.2. Operation &Monitor
When the operator is at the Operation &Monitor mode, the frequency can be set and the output frequency, output
current, the multi-function data and the RAM data can be monitored.

5-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 5-4 Operations in Operation &Monitor Mode


Parameter Descriptions
Tab 5-5 Contents of the Operation &Monitor Parameters
Parameter Description
Frequency Reference, which can be set.
M0-00
The other parameters in this mode can only be monitored but not set.
M0-01 Output Frequency
M0-02 Output Current
Multi-function display, please refer to [00-06] parameter of the inverter. The [M1-00] is same to the
M1Group
value when [00-06]=0, and the [M1-01] is same to the value when [00-06]=1, and so on.
RAM MAP Monitor. Which parameter monitored is due to the inverter’s 13th group parameters value.
M2Group The value of [M2-01] is corresponding to the value of the address set by [13-01], the value of [M2-02] is
corresponding to the value of the address set by [13-02], and so on.
5.2.3. Parameters Set
The parameter of the inverter can be set and read in Parameters Set mode. A parameter can be changed from the
setting displays using the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys. Example key operations in Parameters Set

5-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

mode are shown in the following figure.

Fig 5-5 Operations in Parameters Set mode


The contents of the parameter display are shown below.

Fig 5-6 Contents of Parameter Display 1


The Read Only signal is only displayed when the parameter can be read only. And also the unit is only displayed
when the parameter has the unit. The display is different when the parameter has a sub menu.

Fig 5-7 Contents of the Parameter Display 2


The contents of the parameters can refer to the chapter of Parameters Description. The process of setting [01-05]
from 10.00sec to 15.00sec is described at the following figure.

5-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 5-8 Example of Parameter Set


5.2.4. Parameters Verify
The Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a
programming mode. The 1-Verify operation is to verify the parameters default settings and the current settings. The
2-Resulut operation is to display the parameters which default settings are different to the current settings. In this
display, the parameter also can be set.
2 2 ! " # $ % $ % $ %
! " # $ % $ % ! # # 0&1 0' " #" " - $ % .
' # ( "

$ % $ %
$ % #/ ) - $ % .

! " # $ % ' " ) "


$ % *
' # ( " ' +,, ,

! " # $ %
& ' # ( "

Fig 5-9 Operations in Parameters Verify Mode


5.2.5. Fault History
The fault history and the inverter status when fault happened can be read in this mode, also in the Parameters Set
mode. It is more convenience to view the fault information in the fault history mode. The [F0-01] corresponds to the
[12-00], and the [F0-02] corresponds to the [12-02] and so on. The [F1-01] corresponds to the [12-07], and the [F1-02]
corresponds to the [12-08] and so on. Please refer to7.3.12. Example key operations are shown in the following figure.

5-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 5-10 Operations in Fault History Mode

Fig 5-11 Contents of Fault Record Display

Fig 5-12 Contents of F1 Group Display


5.2.6. Data Transfer
The Digital Operator can perform the following two functions using a built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory).

5-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

1) Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator by 1-Data Upload.
2) Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter by 2-Data Download.
Example key operations are shown in the following figure.

Fig 5-13 Operations of Data Transfer


5.2.7. Keypad Set
The parameters in Keypad Set mode are interrelated to the operator. Example of key operations is shown in the
following figure.

Fig 5-14 Operations of Keypad Set

5-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

The contents of the parameters are shown on the following table.


Tab 5-6 Contents of the Keypad Set Parameters

Pr. Explanation Unit Default Min Max Settings

K0-00 Contrast Adjust / 8 0 16 The LCD display contrast adjustment.



0: Mode1 Pr[M0-00]:Frequency Reference
is active as soon as it's set without ENTER
K0-01 Freq Set Mode / 0 0 1 key.

1: Mode2 Pr[M0-00]:Frequency Reference
is active only when it's set by ENTER key.
0: No-Function
K0-02 Parameter Reset / 0 0 1 1:the initial values are set to the parameters
of the operator
0:No-Functuion
1:Erase; erase the data in the Key-Pad
K0-03 Flash Erase / 0 0 1 memory, include key-pad parameter and
the frequency converter parameter which is
transferred from other frequency converter
When the key-pad is idle,through K0-04
setting the time (uit: minute) ,as the LCD
safe state . now , close the screen power ,if
K0-04 Screen Save Time min 2 1 5
the frequency converter has no bug ,
stepinto the normal screen ; if bug exist,
step into the fault indication screen.
0: LCD Positive display
K0-07 Display Mode / 0 0 1
1: LCD Negative display
K1-00 Version / / / / The software version of the operator

5-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

6. Operation
This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter.
6.1. Operation Precautions

Be sure to install the front cover before turning the power ON. Do not remove the covers while power is applied.
Otherwise electric shock could occur.
Do not operate switches with wet hands.
Doing so could cause electric shock.
If an alarm reset is made with the Run command signal turned ON, a sudden start will occur. Ensure that the Run
command signal is turned OFF in advance.
Otherwise an accident could occur.
If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual, the motor may
rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
In the tuning process of the inverter, no motor torque control for braking of the machinery takes effect.Tune the
inverter for the motor after disconnecting it from the machinery, or after mechanically brakes the machinery. Anyway,
do it after suppressing any dangerous factors.
An accident or injuries could occur.
Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops.
Do not touch the three phase AC motor terminals even when the power has been shut off for a inverter, voltage
continues to be generated at the motor terminals while the motor coasts to stop.
Doing so could cause electric shock.

Do not turn the main circuit power (circuit breaker) ON or OFF in order to start or stop inverter operation.
Doing so could cause failure.
Do not touch the heat sink because they become very hot.
Doing so could cause burns.
Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy. Before changing the frequency (speed) setting, check the specifications
of the motor and machinery.
The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means.
Injuries could occur.

6.2. Trial Operation


6.2.1. Inspection and Preparation Prior to Powering On
1) Check if connection is correct. Especially check if the power wires are connected to the inverter input
terminals R, S and T, and output terminals U, V and W respectively and that the grounding wires are
connected to the ground electrodes correctly. ÿ refer to Fig 6-1 .

$%

! " #

Fig 6-1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals


2) Make sure that no screws, loose wire ends, or tools are left in the inverter.
3) Check for short circuits between terminals and exposed live parts and ground faults.
4) Check if the motor is separated from mechanical equipment.

6-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

5) Check if safety measures are taken against runaway of the system, e.g., a defense to protect people from
unexpectedly approaching your power system.
6) Make sure that the signal wires from the pulse encoder (PG) mounted on the motor are connected to PG card
(option card) correctly.
7) Make sure that the power supply voltage (+5V/+12V) to the pulse encoder satisfies the specifications.
6.2.2. Turning ON Power and Checking
After turning the power on, the inverter mode display should appear and no fault or alarm should be displayed. In
case of any error refer to Troubleshooting.
6.2.3. Preparation before Running the Motor
Before starting running the motor, set motor parameters specified in Tab 6-1 to the motor ratings. For the motor,
check the rated values printed on the nameplate of the motor.
To set up parameters, you need to use the digital operator or to access the parameters via communications link. For
details of the digital operator and communications link, refer to Chapter 5 and Chapter 9 respectively. For the factory
defaults for the motor parameter, refer to the Chapter 7. If the parameter for your motor differs from the default, please
change it or run Auto-Tuning.
Tab 6-1 Parameters Settings before Driving the Motor
Common Part:
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Used to select the control method for the
Inverter.
00-04 0004H Control Methods 8 0 10 4: IM vector control with PG; 0x2010
8: PM vector control with PG;
others: Reserved.
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator;
1: Reserved;
00-11 000BH Source Of Freq. 0 0 5 0x2010
2: Analog input terminal;
3: Multi-function input terminal;
4: Reserved.
5: Reserved.
Sets the Run Command input method.
0: Digital Operator;
00-12 000CH Source Of Oper. 0 0 3 1: Multi-function input terminal; 0x2010
2: Reserved;
3: Reserved.
Used to set the stopping method used
when a Stop Command is input.
0: Ramp to stop;
1: Coast to stop.
If 0 is set, the inverter Decelerates output
00-13 000DH Stop Methods 0 0 1 frequency to zero according to time 0x2010
characteristics (shown in 11.3).
If 1 is set, the inverter stops outputting
PWM wave immediately when Stop
Command is input, leaving motor free-run
until stop.
Sets the unit of the frequency type
parameters
0: Hz;
01-00 0100H Frequency units 0 0 3 0x2010
1: rpm;
2: m/s;
3: m/min
01-01 Max Output
0101H Hz 60.00 0.01 399.98 Sets the maximum output frequency 0x1610
*3 Freq.
10-00 Sets the number of pulses for each cycle
0A00H Encoder pulses 6000 1 40000 0x0010
*3 of the PG control.

6-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the encoder input type.
0: Phase A leads in a forward run
command and phase B leads in a reverse
run command.

10-01 0A01H PG input setting 0 0 1 0x2010


1: Phase B leads in a forward run
command and phase A leads in a reverse
run command.

PM Part:
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the autotuning mode.
0: No function;
1: Magnetic pole theta detect;
2: Stationary autotuning;
05-00 0500H PM Auto-Tuning 0 0 6 0x6010
3: DC Orient;
4: Cogging Torque;
5: S-curve running simulation caculating;
6: Motion;
05-01 Motor Rated Sets the motor rated current(not beyond
0501H Amp 32.00 0.01 655.35 0x0211
*3 current 200% rated current).
05-03 Motor Rated
0503H rpm 168 1 65535 Sets the base speed of the motor in min-1. 0x0012
*3 Speed
05-04
0504H Motor Poles 40 2 200 Sets the number of motor poles. 0x0010
*3
Sets the BEMF of motor. (The output
05-05 Motor No-Load
0505H V 127.0 0.1 300.0 phase voltage RMS when motor no-load 0x0112
*3 Vol
runs at rated speed )
Sets the motor phase-to-phase resistance.
05-06
0506H Motor Rs ohm 0.160 0.001 65.535 This parameter is automatically set during 0x0312
*3
auto tuning.
Sets the motor d-axis inductance. This
05-08
0508H Motor Ld mH 3.1 0.1 1000.0 parameter is automatically set during auto 0x0112
*3
tuning.
Sets the motor q-axis inductance. This
05-09
0509H Motor Lq mH 3.7 0.1 1000.0 parameter is automatically set during auto 0x0112
*3
tuning.
Z-pulse Theta of Z-pulse position.This parameter
05-16 0510H deg 360.0 0.0 360.0 0x0100 8.7
MagPoleTheta is automaticclly set.It’s read only.
Sets this parameter to reset theta of
z-pulse position. User need to reset the
theta under listed condition following.
1 A/B wire sequence of encode is
Reset
05-17 0511H 0 0 1 changed; 0x6010 8.7
Z-MagPoleTheta
2. Encoder changed;
3: Motor changed;
4: Phase sequence on the motor is
changed.
05-18 MagPolDetect Sets the ouput voltage during magnetic
0512H V 240.0 0 263.0 0x0113 8.7
*3 Vcmd pole theta detecting.

6-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the interval time during magnetic
pole theta detecting. Detecting would fail
05-19 MagPolDetect if output current is low although 05-18 is
0513H Sec 0.001 0.001 0.010 0x0312 8.7
*3 Time set the maximum value, In this condition,
user could change this parameter to sovle
this problem.

IM part:
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the autotuning mode for IM.
0: No function;
1: Rotational autotuning;
05-30 051EH IM Auto-Tuning 0 0 3 0x6010
2: Stationary autotuning;
3: S-curve running simulation caculating.

05-31 Sets the motor stator phase resistor.


051FH IM Rs ohm 0.200** 0.001 65.535 0x0312
*3
05-32 Sets the motor rotor phase resistor.
0520H IM Rr ohm 0.200** 0.001 65.535 0x0312
*3
05-33 IM No-Load Sets the no-load current for the motor.
0521H Amp 10.00** 0.01 655.35 0x0212
*3 Current
05-34 Sets the motor mutual inductance.
0522H IM Lm mH 40.0** 0.1 6553.5 0x0112
*3
05-35 Sets the motor leakage inductance.
0523H IM Lx mH 4.0** 0.1 6553.5 0x0112
*3
Rated Output Rated Output Frequency
11-01 0B01H Hz 50.00 0.01 399.98 0x1610
Freq.
11-02 Rated Output Rated Output Frequency Voltage
0B02H V 380.0 0.0 480.0 0x0111
*2 Voltage
*2: Changes with Model type of Drive (00-00) Selection.
*3: Changes with Motor Code (05-10) Selection.
To drive a PM motor, you need to tune the inverter for the angle of magnet pole before running the motor.
The inverter allows choosing different display units for speed related parameters and monitors. The units can be
selected using parameter 01-00 as shown Tab 6-1. When using setting 2 or 3 certain mechanical data have to be
programmed to the inverter prior to changing 01-00. Perform the following steps.
1) Make sure motor data are set up correctly. Verify the setting of the maximum output frequency in parameter
01-01 and the setting for the number of motor poles in parameter 05-04.
2) Set the traction sheave diameter in units of mm to parameter 07-01.
3) Set the correct roping to parameter 07-02 and the gear ratio of the mechanical gear 05-11.
4) Change parameter 01-00 to setting 2 or 3. The unit and setting values of related parameters will be changed
automatically.
5) Set the othter parameter.
6.2.4. Auto-Tuning
1) Types of Auto-Tuning
The inverter offers different types of Auto-Tuning for induction motors and permanent magnet motors. The type of
Auto-Tuning used differs further based on the control mode and other operating conditions. Refer to the tables below to
select the type of Auto-Tuning that bests suits the application.
A. Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors
Tab 6-2 Types of Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors
Type setting Requirements and Benefits
a) Used if a motor test report is not available (motor BEMF 05-05 available).
b) Input motor data like on name plate. Make sure to convert data into the
Stationary Auto-Tuning 05-00=2
correct unit before. The inverter automatically calculates the motor data.
c) Apply the brakes and fix the rotor. It is acceptable without the brake also.
Rotational Auto-Tuning 05-00=6 a) Tunes BEMF only.
Tab 6-3 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure the data is available before starting
Auto-Tuning. The information needed is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by
the motor manufacturer.

6-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Tab 6-3 Aotu-Tuning Input Data


Description Unit Parameter No
Motor Rated current Amp 05-01
Motor Rated Speed rpm 05-03
Motor Poles - 05-04
MagPolDetect Vcmd V 05-18
MagPolDetect Time Sec 05-19
Encoder pulses - 10-00

Tab 6-4 Parameter set automatically after auto-tuning


Description Parameter No Unit Rotational Auto-Tunning Stationary Auto-Tuning
(05-00 = 6) (05-00 = 2)
Motor No-Load Vol 05-05 V Yes No
Motor Rs 05-06 ohm No Yes
Motor Ld 05-08 mH No Yes
Motor Lq 05-09 mH No Yes

B. Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors

Tab 6-5 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors


Type setting Requirements and Benefits
Rotational Auto-Tuning 05-30=1 a) Used if a motor test report is not available.
b) Input motor data like on name plate. Make sure to convert data into the
Stationary Auto-Tuning 05-30=2 correct unit before. The inverter automatically calculates the motor data.
c) Apply the brakes and fix the rotor. It is acceptable without the brake also.
Tab 6-6 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure the data is available before starting
Auto-Tuning. The information needed is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by
the motor manufacturer.

Tab 6-6 Auto-Tuning Input Data


Description Unit Parameter No
Motor Rated current Amp 05-01
Motro1 Rated P kW 05-02
Motor Rated Speed rpm 05-03
Motor Poles - 05-04
Encoder pulses - 10-00
Rated Output Freq. Hz 11-01
Rated Output Voltage V 11-02

Tab 6-7 Parameter set automatically after auto-tuning


Description Parameter No Unit Rotational Auto-Tunning Stationary Auto-Tuning
(05-30 = 1) (05-30 = 2)
IM Rs 05-31 ohm Yes Yes
IM Rr 05-32 ohm Yes Yes
IM No-Load Current 05-33 Amp Yes No
IM Lm 05-34 mH Yes Yes
IM Lx 05-35 mH Yes Yes

C. Magnetic Pole Position Detection for Permanent Magnet Motors


Magnetic Pole Position Detection is used for PM motors. It measures the angle between the encoder zero position
and the rotor magnet orientation. It needs to be performed when:
An inverter is setup the first time.
When the motor rotation direction has been changed.
When the encoder rotation direction has been changed.
When the encoder has been replaced.
Before performing Magnetic Pole Position Detection the motor and encoder data as shown must be set properly.
During the detection, apply the brakes and fix the rotor. The current magnectic pole theta can be obtained as unfix the
rotor
2) Auto-Tuning Operation procedure
A. Selection of tuning process.

6-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

B. Enter Data from the motor nameplate.


Referring to the rating plate on the motor, set the motor data as shown in Tab 6-3 or Tab 6-6.
C. Preparation of Machine System
Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load, such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the
safety device.
D. Perform tuning
Press run to activate Auto-Tuning.The inverter begins by injecting current into the motor for about 10 s.
3) Errors during tuning
If any of error has occurred, immediately stop operation and determine the cause referring toTroubleshooting, then
eliminate the abnormal or error factor(s) and perform tuning again, or contact your representative.
6.2.5. Trial Operation
The procedures for trial operation of the inverter using Digital Operator are followed.
1) Turn the power ON and check that there is no error shown in the Digital Operator

2) Enter the local mode

3) Select a low reference speed around at 30 rpm by using the  key.


4) Press the key to start running the motor in the forward direction.

5) To stop the motor, press the key .

6) Press the key to change the direction of the motor rotation and press the key to start running the
motor in the reverse direction.

7) To stop the motor, press the key .


Be sure of that:
Check for the right direction of the motor rotation
Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration.
Check for smooth acceleration and Deceleration.
When no abnormality is found, increase the motor speed and check the above points again.

6-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7. Parameter Tables
7.1. Description of parameter tables
Parameter tables are structured as shown below.
Parameter No.: The address of the parameter shown in Digital Opertator.
Parameter Addr.: It’s the register number used for Modbus communications.
Description: Function of the parameter. It’s also the display shown in the Digital Opertator.
Unit: Unit of the parameter if available.
Default: Default value of the parameter.
Min: Minimum value could be set of the parameter.
Max: Maximum value could be set of the parameter.
Setting: Details on the function or settings of the parameter.
Att: Attribute of the parameter. It’s a 16-bit MSB structure as shown below.
Ref: Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter.For example: 7.6 for
Chapter 7, Section 6; 13-00 for referring to the detail of parameter 13-00.

bit15: Reserved
bit14: Reserved
bit13: Reserved
Frequency unit is variable depending on parameter 01-00 (0: No; 1: Yes). If bit12 is 1, the default value, max
bit12:
value and min value varies depending on 01-00.
bit11: Reserved
bit10: Dot location can be changed ( 0: No; 1: Yes).
bit9-bit8: Dot location (00: Integer ; 01: 1 bit; 10: 2 bits; 11: 3 bits).
bit7: Signed (0: No; 1: Yes).
bit6: In Hex. (0: No; 1: Yes).
bit5: Reserved
bit4: Allow to reset (0: No; 1: Yes).
bit3: Read only (0: No; 1: Yes).
bit2: Reserved
bit1: Can be set in running (0: No; 1: Yes).
200V/380V class related (0: No; 1: Yes.).If bit0 is 1, the default value, max value and min value varies
bit0: depending on 00-00.When the drive is 200V class, the def/max/min value is half of that when the drive is
380V-class.
7.2. Parameter groups
Parameters are divided into 15 groups of different use for convinence.Groups are listed as following.
Group 0 - System Parameter
Group 1 - Speed Command
Group 2 - Digital Output/Input Parameter
Group 3 - Analog Output/Input Parameter
Group 4 - FOC Torque/Current Control
Group 5 - Motor Parameter
Group 6 - Protection Parameter
Group 7 - Lift function
Group 8 - Reserved
Group 9 - Communication Parameter
Group 10 - Speed Feedback Parameter
Group 11 – V/F Parameter
Group 12 - Fault Record
Group 13 - RAM Map Parameter
Group 14 - User Define Parameter

7-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3. Parameter Tables


7.3.1. 00 - System Parameter
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Used to set the model type of
00-00 0000H Model type of Drive 19 0 39 0x4008 14.1
Drive.
00-01 Display the inverter rated current
0001H Rated Current Amp 0.00 0.00 655.35 0x4218 14.1
*2 (According to 00-00)
Used to select parameters reset
mode.
00-02 0002H Parameter Reset 0 0 65535 0x4000
0: No function;
10: Reset parameters .
Used to set access level
00-03 0003H Access level 2 0 2 0: quick setting; 1: standard setting; 0x6000
2: extended setting
Used to select the control method
for the Inverter.
00-04 0004H Control Methods 8 0 10 4: IM vector control with PG; 0x2010
8: PM vector control with PG;
Others: Reserved.
Used to set User Display item
0: Reference Torque (100% For
Motor Rated Current);
1: Feedback Torque (100% For
Motor Rated Current);
2: Dcbus Adpu;
3: Dcbus Vol 0.1V;
4: Feedback Speed;
5: Status Of Digital Input Terminal
(1 For Effective);
00-06 0006H User Display 3 0 65535 6: Status Of Digital Output 0x0052
Terminal (1 For Effective);
7: Heatsink Temperature TH1(  );
8: Output Voltage 0.1V;
9: AVI Adpu;
A:ACI Adpu;
B:AUI Adpu;
C:Weighting Adpu;
D: Output Current(0.01A);
E: Output Power.
SWVE
Display inverter software version
00-07 0007H Software Version RSIO 0.00 655.35 0x4218
(Read only)
N
Used to input password or display
the password mismatch times. If a
password is set in 00-09, inputting
the right password can unlock the
parameters. When a password
00-08 0008H Password Input 0 0 65535 different from the former one is set 0x4002
in 00-09, parameters will be locked
again. When password mismatch
times reach 3, User should restart
the inverter to obtain another 3
chances to input password.

7-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Used to set the password or to get
the condition of password set.
0 can be set for no password.
1~65535 can be set as password.
Displaying 0 means no password
00-09 0009H Password Set 0 0 65535 set or password matched and user 0x4002
can set parameters. Displaying 1
means parameters are locked and
user can’ t set any parameter.
Password can be set only when
displaying 0.
00-10
000AH Carry Frequency kHz 10 2 15 Used to set the carrier frequency 0x0010
*2
Sets the frequency reference input
method.
0: Digital Operator;
1: Reserved;
00-11 000BH Source Of Freq. 0 0 5 0x2010
2: Analog input terminal;
3: Multi-function input terminal;
4: Reserved.
5: Reserved
Sets the Run Command input
method.
0: Digital Operator;
00-12 000CH Source Of Oper. 0 0 3 0x2010
1: Multi-function input terminal;
2: Reserved;
3: Reserved.
Used to set the stopping method
used when a Stop Command is
input.
0: Ramp to stop;
1: Coast to stop.
If 0 is set, the inverter Decelerates
00-13 000DH Stop Methods 0 0 1 output frequency to zero according 0x2010
to time characteristics.
If 1 is set, the inverter stops
outputting PWM wave
immediately when Stop Command
is input, leaving motor free-run
until stop.
Used to set the inverter running
direction control mode.
00-14 000EH Reverse Operation 0 0 2 0: Reverse available; 0x2010
1: Reverse forbidden;
2: Forward forbidden.
Used to select the language
displayed on the DIGITAL
Digital Operator
00-15 000FH 0 0 1 OPERATOR. 0x2012
Language
0: English;
1: Chinese.
Dsiplay the data of manufacture
00-16 0010H Date of Manufac.(Y) 65535 2000 65535 0x4008
(Year)
Dsiplay the data of manufacture
00-17 0011H Date of Manufac.(M) 65535 1 65535 0x4008
(Month)
Dsiplay the data of manufacture
00-18 0012H Date of Manufac.(D) 65535 1 65535 0x4008
(Date)
00-19 0013H Serial Number 65535 1 65535 Display the serial number 0x4008
Display the inverter hardware
00-20 0014H Hardware Version 65535 1 65535 0x4008
version
*2:Changes with Model type of Drive (00-00) Selection.

7-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.2. 01 - Speed Command


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the unit of the frequency type
parameters
0: Hz;
01-00 0100H Frequency units 0 0 3 0x2010
1: rpm;
2: m/s;
3: m/min
01-01
0101H Max Output Freq. Hz 60.00 0.01 399.98 Sets the maximum output frequency 0x1610
*3
Sets the acceleration time 1 to
01-05
0105H 1st Acc time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 accelerate from 0 Hz to the 0x0212 8.4
*2
maximum output frequency.
Sets the Deceleration time 1 to
01-06
0106H 1st Dec time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 Decelerate from the maximum 0x0212 8.4
*2
output frequency to 0 Hz.
Sets the acceleration time 4 to
01-11 010BH 4th Acc time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 accelerate from 0 Hz to the 0x0212
maximum output frequency.
Sets the Deceleration time 4 to
01-12 010CH 4th Dec time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 Decelerate from the maximum 0x0212
output frequency to 0 Hz.
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 Hz to the
01-13 010DH JOG Acc time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 0x0212 8.2
maximum output frequency when
inspection run mode is activated.
Sets the Deceleration time to
Decelerate from the maximum
01-14 010EH JOG DEC. time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 0x0212 8.2
output frequency to 0 Hz when
inspection run mode is activated.
Sets the frequency reference when
01-15 010FH JOG Frequency Hz 6.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection run mod is activated.
Sets the switch frequency for
ACC/EDC. 1 to 4 inverter swiches between using 1st
01-16 0110H Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612
Freq Acc/No. time and using 4th
Acc/No. time.
Sets S-curve characteristic time at
01-17 0111H S curve Accel time 1 sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
acceleration start.
Sets characteristic time at
01-18 0112H S curve Accel time 2 sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
acceleration end.
S curve Decelel time Sets S-curve characteristic time at
01-19 0113H sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
1 Deceleration start.
Sets S-curve characteristic time at
01-20 0114H S curve Decel time 2 sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
Deceleration end.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-23 0117H Multi-Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0001.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-24 0118H Multi-Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0010.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-25 0119H Multi-Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0011.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-26 011AH Multi-Speed 4 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0100.
Sets the frequency reference when
01-27 011BH Multi-Speed 5 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 multi-step speed reference 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input

7-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
is 0101.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-28 011CH Multi-Speed 6 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0110.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-29 011DH Multi-Speed 7 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 0111.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-30 011EH Multi-Speed 8 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1000.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-31 011FH Multi-Speed 9 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1001.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-32 0120H Multi-Speed 10 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1010.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-33 0121H Multi-Speed 11 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1011.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-34 0122H Multi-Speed 12 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1100.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-35 0123H Multi-Speed 13 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1101.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-36 0124H Multi-Speed 14 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1110.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-37 0125H Multi-Speed 15 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function input
is 1111.
*2: Changes with Model type of Drive (00-00) Selection.
*3: Changes with Motor Code (05-10) Selection.

7-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.3. 02 - Digital Output/Input Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the 2/3 wire control mode.
0: foword/stop, reverse/stop;
1: reverse/forword, run/stop;
2: 3 wire control.

02-00 0200H 2/3 Wire Control 0 0 2 0x2010

Multi-function input terminal 1 function


selection
0: No function;
1: Multi-step speed reference 1;
2: Multi-step speed reference 2;
3: Multi-step speed reference 3;
MultiFunction In 4: Multi-step speed reference 4;
02-01 0201H 1 0 11 0x2010 8.8
1 5: External fault (EF) input;
6: Inspection run;
7: Fault/Warn external reset;
8: Battery operation;
9: Weighing signal 1;
10:Weighing signal 2;
11: Weighing signal 3.
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 2 function
02-02 0202H 2 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 2 selection
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 3 function
02-03 0203H 3 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 3 selection
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 4 function
02-04 0204H 4 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 4 selection
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 5 function
02-05 0205H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 5 selection
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 6 function
02-06 0206H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 6 selection
Multi-Function Multi-function input terminal 7 function
02-07 0207H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
In 7 selection
Multi-function output terminal RA/ RB/
RC function selection.
1: During run indicate;
2: Frequency agreement indicate;
3: Frequency agreement indicate 2;
4: Fault indicate;
Multi-Func.Out
02-11 020BH 1 0 9 5: Control signal of Brake; 0x2012 8.9
1
6: Control signal of contactor on the
output side;
7: Warn indicate;
8: Ouput current under level indicate;
9: Control signal of contactor on the input
side.
Multi-Func.Out Multi-function output terminal MRA1/
02-12 020CH 4 0 9 0x2012 8.9
2 MRC1 function selection.
Multi-Func.Out Multi-function output terminal MO1
02-13 020FH 0 0 9 0x2012 8.9
3 function selection.  same as 02-11 

7-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Multi-Func.Out Multi-function output terminal MO2
02-14 0210H 0 0 9 0x2012 8.9
4 function selection.  same as 02-11 
Sets the multi-function output terminal
action mode in 16-bit.Terminals output
level when the related bit is set 1 on the
contrary of that when the bit is set 0.
Multi-Output
02-17 0211H 0 0 65535 bit0: RA/ RB/ RC; 0x0052 8.9
ACT
bit1: MRA/ MRC;

bit2: MO1;
bit3: MO2.
Sets the multi-function input response
MI Response time to prevent terminals from
02-18 0212H sec 0.005 0.001 30.000 0x0312 8.8
Time interference but introducing response
delay.
Sets the desired frequency agreement
02-19 0213H DESIRE-FREQ1 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
detection level 1.
DESIRE-FREQ1 Sets the frequency agreement detection
02-20 0214H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND band for level 1.
Sets the desired frequency agreement
02-21 0215H DESIRE-FREQ2 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
detection level 2.
DESIRE-FREQ2 Sets the frequency agreement detection
02-22 0216H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND band for level 2.
Sets the output current detect level.
If a multi-function output terminal is
programmed for this function (8 is set in
the according parameter), the output will
be switched ON when the feedback
current is lower than the value set in
02-25 0219H Current Detect % 2 0 250 02-25. The output level depends on 02-27 0x0012 8.9
(low level for ON when 02-27 is set to 1,
otherwise high level).
'1 ' ( ' '
&3

&' ' (' ) ( *+,


&$$
-. /0 -. /02 +

Sets the multi-function input terminal


action mode in 16-bit. When the related
bit is set 1, the terminal treats the same
input level as the status on the contrary of
that when the bit is set 0.
bit0: FWD;
bit1: REV;
02-27 021BH Multi-Input ACT 0 0 65535 bit2: MI1; 0x0052 8.8
bit3: MI2;
bit4: MI3;
bit5: MI4;
bit6: MI5;
bit7: MI6;
bit8: MI7;

02-29 Weighing for weighing switch 1(100% for


021DH Weighing 1 % 20 0 110 0x0010
*4 rated load)

02-30 Weighing for weighing switch 2(100% for


021EH Weighing 2 % 50 0 110 0x0010
*4 rated load)

02-31 Weighing for weighing switch 3(100% for


021FH Weighing 3 % 80 0 110 0x0010
*4 rated load)
*4:02-29 should be less than 02-30 and 02-31 should be more than 02-30.

7-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.4. 03 - Analog Output/Input Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AVI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0-
10V(varies according to 03-09 ) for
0-maximum output
8.3
03-00 0300H AVI Input setting 1 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V(varies according to 03-09 )
for 0~maximim ouput torque
(04-02);
4: Reserved.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal ACI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~ 10V/ 0
~ 20mA(varies according to
03-10 ) for 0 ~ maximum output
8.3
03-01 0301H ACI Input setting 0 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA(varies according
to 03-10) for 0~maximim ouput
torque;
4: Reserved.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AUI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~ 10V/ 0
~ -10V(varies according to 03-11 )
for 0 ~ maximum output
8.3
03-02 0302H AUI Input setting 0 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V / 0 ~ -10V(varies according
to 03-11) for 0~maximim ouput
torque;
4: Reserved.
Sets the input bias of AVI terminal.
When bias level is input, the
03-03 0303H AVI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0x0192 8.10
according function command is
zero. (0 ~ 10V for 0~ 100%)
Sets the input bias of ACI terminal.
When bias level is input, the
03-04 0304H ACI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0x0192 8.10
according function command is
zero. (0 ~ 20mA for 0~ 100%)
Sets the input bias of AUI terminal.
When bias level is input, the
03-05 0305H AUI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0x0192 8.10
according function command is
zero. (-10 ~ 10V for -100~ 100%)
Selects the bais mode of AVI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
03-06 0306H AVI input Polarity 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center

7-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Selects the bais mode of ACI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
03-07 0307H ACI input Polarity 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center
Selects the bais mode of AUI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
03-08 0308H AUI input Polarity 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center
Sets the input gain of AVI
03-09 0309H AVI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0192 8.10
terminal.
03-10 030AH ACI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 Sets the input gain of ACI terminal. 0x0192 8.10
Sets the input gain of AUI
03-11 030BH AUI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0192 8.10
terminal.
Selects the function of ACI
ACII/ACIU terminal.
03-12 030CH 0 0 1 0x2012 8.10
Selection 0: ACII;
1: ACIU;
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-13 030DH AVI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the AVI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-14 030EH ACI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the ACI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-15 030FH AUI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the AUI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Select the function of the analog
output terminal AFM.
0: Frequency command in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
1: Frequency output in Hz, 100%
for 400Hz;
2: Frequency feedback in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
3: Current output, 100% for 2.5
times of inverter rated current;
4: D-axis voltage reference, 100%
03-18 0312H AFM Setting 0 0 13 for 577.4V; 0x0012
5: Q-axis voltage reference, 100%
for 577.4V;
6: Half DCBus voltage, 100% for
577.4V;
7: AVI;
8: ACI;
9: AUI;
10: Iq reference;
11: Iq feedback;
12: Id reference;
13: Id feedback;
03-19 0313H AFM Gain % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 Sets the output gain of AFM 0x0112

7-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the AFM output mode.
0: Output the absolute voltage;
1: Output zero voltage if according
03-20 0314H AFM In Minus 0 0 2 0x2012
value is in minus
2: Output 0 ~ 10V for -100% ~
100%.

AFMU/AFMI Annolog output set  0  0~10V  1 


03-21 0315H 0 0 1 0x2012
Select 0~20mA 

Select the function of the pulse


output terminal DFM.
0: Frequency command in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
1: Frequency output in Hz, 100%
for 400Hz;
2: Frequency feedback in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
3: Current output, 100% for 2.5
times of inverter rated current;
4: D-axis voltage reference, 100%
03-22 0316H Pulse Output 0 0 13 for 577.4V; 0x0012
5: Q-axis voltage reference, 100%
for 577.4V;
6: Half DCBus voltage, 100% for
577.4V;
7: AVI;
8: ACI;
9: AUI;
10: Iq reference;
11: Iq feedback;
12: Id reference;
13: Id feedback;

03-23 0317H Pulse Output Gain % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 DFM gain: 0~setting for 0~20kHz 0x0112

Sets the DFM output mode.


0: Output the absolute value;
Pulse Output 1: Output zero if according value is
03-24 0318H 0 0 2 0x2012
Reverse Setting in minus
2: Output 0 ~ 20kHz for -100% ~
100%.

Pulse input gain, 0~20kHz for


03-25 0319H Pulse Input Gain % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 0x0112
0~[01-01]

7.3.5. 04 - FOC Torque/Current Control


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the maximum torque reference,
04-02 0402H TQR MAX. LEVEL % 100 0 250 0x0010
100% for motor rated torque.
Choose the source of Id reference
0: Reserved;
04-17 0411H SOURCE OF Id 3 0 3 1: Reserved; 0x2010
2: Reserved;
3: Flux weaking control.
04-18 0412H Ia DC Offset Err 0 -512 512 Sets the Ia DC offset error. 0x0092

7-10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
04-19 0413H Ic DC Offset Err 0 -512 512 Sets the Ic DC offset error. 0x0092

7.3.6. 05 - Motor Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the autotuning mode.
0: No function;
1: Magnetic pole theta detect;
2: Stationary autotuning;
05-00 0500H PM Auto-Tuning 0 0 6 3: Reserved; 0x6010
4: Reserved;
5: S-curve running simulation
caculating.
6: Rotational autotuning.
05-01 Motor Rated Sets the motor rated current.
0501H Amp 32.00 0.01 655.35 0x0210
*1*3 current
05-02 0502H Motor Rated P kW 0.00 0.00 655.35 Sets the motor rated power 0x0212
05-03 Sets the base speed of the motor in
0503H Motor Rated Speed rpm 168 1 65535 0x0012
*3 min-1.
05-04 Sets the number of motor poles.
0504H Motor Poles 40 2 200 0x0010
*3
Sets the BEMF of motor. (The
05-05 Motor No-Load
0505H V 127.0 0.1 300.0 output phase voltage RMS when 0x0113
*3 Vol
motor no-load runs at rated speed )
Sets the motor phase-to-phase
05-06 resistance.
0506H Motor Rs ohm 0.160 0.001 65.535 0x0312
*3 This parameter is automatically set
during auto tuning.
Sets the motor d-axis inductance.
05-08
0508H Motor Ld mH 3.1 0.1 1000.0 This parameter is automatically set 0x0112
*3
during auto tuning.
Sets the motor q-axis inductance.
05-09
0509H Motor Lq mH 3.7 0.1 1000.0 This parameter is automatically set 0x0112
*3
during auto tuning.
05-10 Motor code
050AH Motor Code 65535 0 65535 0x0050
*2
05-11 Sets the gear ratio of the
050BH Mech Gear Ratio 1.00 0.10 50.00 0x0210
*3 mechanical gear
05-15 050FH Motor Slots 36 1 200 Motor Slots. 0x0010
Theta of Z-pulse position.This
Z-pulse
05-16 0510H deg 360.0 0 360.0 parameter is automaticclly set.It’ s 0x0100 8.7
MagPoleTheta
read only.
Sets this parameter to reset theta of
z-pulse position. User need to reset
the theta under listed condition
following.
Reset 1 A/B wire sequence of encode is
05-17 0511H 0 0 1 0x6010 8.7
Z-MagPoleTheta changed;
2. encoder changed;
3: Motor changed;
4: Phase sequence on the ouput
side is changed.
05-18 MagPolDetect Sets the ouput voltage during
0512H V 240.0 0.0 263.0 0x0113 8.7
*3 Vcmd magnetic pole theta detecting.
Sets the interval time during
magnetic pole theta detecting.
Detecting would fail if output
05-19 MagPolDetect
0513H Sec 0.001 0.001 0.010 current is low although 05-18 is set 0x0312 8.7
*3 Time
the maximum value, In this
condition, user could change this
parameter to sovle this problem.

7-11
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 1. This
05-20 0514H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
1
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 2. This
05-21 0515H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
2
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 3. This
05-22 0516H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
3
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 4. This
05-23 0517H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
4
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 5. This
05-24 0518H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
5
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 6. This
05-25 0519H 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
6
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 7. This
05-26 051AH 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
7
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 8. This
05-27 051BH 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
8
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 9. This
05-28 051CH 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
9
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the cogging torque
Cogging Torq Cal compensation value 10. This
05-29 051DH 0 -32767 32767 parameter is automatically set 0x0092
10
during atuo tuning.It’ s read only.
Sets the autotuning mode for IM.
0: No function;
1: Rotational autotuning;
05-30 051EH IM Auto-Tuning 0 0 3 0x6010
2: Stationary autotuning;
3: S-curve running simulation
caculating.
05-31 Sets the motor stator phase resistor.
051FH IM Rs ohm 0.200** 0.001 65.535 0x0312
*3
05-32 Sets the motor rotor phase resistor.
0520H IM Rr ohm 0.200** 0.001 65.535 0x0312
*3
05-33 IM No-Load Sets the no-load current for the
0521H Amp 10.00** 0.01 655.35 0x0212
*3 Current motor.
05-34 Sets the motor mutual inductance.
0522H IM Lm mH 40.0** 0.1 6553.5 0x0112
*3
05-35 Sets the motor leakage inductance.
0523H IM Lx mH 4.0** 0.1 6553.5 0x0112
*3
*1:Max value would not be larger than 2 times of 00-01.
2: Changes with Model type of Drive (00-00) Selection. *3: Changes with Motor Code (05-10) Selection.

7-12
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.7. 06 - Protection Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the maximum torque current
TQR LIMIT
06-00 0600H % 150.0 10.0 250.0 reference. (100% for motor rated 0x0112
@FOCPG torque)
Sets the brake active level. If the
Inverter is 200V series (00-00 is even),
the minimum changes to 280V and the
maximum changes to 450V.

SW Braking
06-01 0601H V 760.0 640.0 800.0 0x0111
Level

Sets the low voltage detection level. If


the inverter is 200V series (00-00 is
even), the minimum changes to 150V
and the maximum changes to 200V.
When the inverter is in STOP status and
phase lost, low voltage detection is
disabled. Warn or fault will be output
only when the low voltage satus lasts
for more than 1 sec when inverter is in
STOP status but 20ms in RUNNING
status. Whether warn or fault ouput is
Low voltage determined by 06-03. The power relay
06-02 0602H V 400.0 370.0 440.0 is also affected by 06-02. When the DC 0x0111
Level
bus is 30V higher than 06-02, the power
relay closes. When the DC bus is lower
than 06-02 and the inverter is in STOP
status, the power relay opens.

Sets the operation for when the low


voltage occurs.
1: A warn is given and continue
Low voltage
06-03 0603H 2 0 2 operation; 0x2012
Action
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the brake short error detection
voltage level. If the Inverter is 200V
DCBRK Err
06-04 0604H V 660.0 370.0 700.0 series (00-00 is even), the minimum 0x0113
Detect L
changes to 250V and the maximum
changes to 350V.
Sets the operation for when the phase
lose occurs.
1: A warn is given and continue
Phase Lose
06-05 0605H 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012
Action
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
The level thermal relay starts to
Thermal Relay work.It’ s the current value at what the
06-13 060DH % 100 50 110 0x0012
Level motor could run continuously.(100% for

7-13
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
motor rated current)

Selects thermal relay mode.


Thermal Relay 0: For inverter motor;
06-14 060EH 0 0 2 1: For general purpose motor; 0x2010
Select
2: Disable.

Sets the time it takes the inverter to


detect motor overheat due to
overload.The total allowed thermal is
Thermal Relay
06-15 060FH sec 60.0 30.0 600.0 that the motor runs with 150% load in 0x0112
Time
the time specified in 06-15.When it
reachs 90%, warn occurs.When it
reachs 100%, inverters stops output.
Sets the Over-heat warning detection
thermal level. If the thermal detected by
OH Warning
06-16 0610H oC 80 45 85 the TH is over 06-16 , the OH1 fault/ 0x0012
Level
warn will be given. Whether fault or
warn is determined by 06-17.
Sets the operation for when the ove
rheat occurs.
1: A warn is given and continue
Over-heat
06-17 0611H 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012
Action
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the control method of the cooling
fan.
0: ON always;
1: OFF 1 miniter after moter stops;
2: ON when motor is running, OFF
when motor stops;
06-18 0612H Cooling Fan 1 0 4 0x2012
3: ON when the temperature level (20oC
higher than the value set in 06-16) is
reached; OFF when the temperature
level (30oC lower than the value set in
06-16) is reached;
4: OFF always.
Sets the operation for when the fan
errort occurs.
1: A warn is given and continue
Fan Error
06-19 0613H 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012
Action
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the auto restart interval time. The
inverter automatically clears the fault
code and recovers to ready status if no
Auto restart such error is detected during the interval
06-22 0616H sec 5.0 0.1 60.0 0x0112
time
time. This function is available for the
following listed fault.
 



  
   
 ! 
Motor Run Display the cumulative motor operation
06-23 0617H min 0 0 1439 0x0008
T(min) time (minute).
Motor Run Display the cumulative motor operation
06-24 0618H day 0 0 65535 0x0008
T(day) time (day).
Fan RUN Display the cumulative cooling fan
06-25 0619H min 0 0 1439 0x0008
T(Min.) operation time (minute).
Display the cumulative cooling fan
06-26 061AH Fan Run T(day) day 0 0 65535 0x0008
operation time (day).
Inverter Run Display the cumulative inverter
06-38 0626H min 0 0 1439 0x0008
T(min) operation time (minute).

7-14
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Inverter Run Display the cumulative inverter
06-39 0627H day 0 0 65535 0x0008
T(day) operation time (day).
Sets the operation for when the TH1
error occurs.
1: A warn is given and continue
TH1 Error
06-40 0628H 2 0 2 operation; 0x2012
Action
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the over voltage detection level.

Over voltage
06-41 0629H V 820.0 700.0 840.0 0x0111
Level

06-42 Sets the minimum input limitation of


062AH AVI Input Min % 0 0 100 0x0012 8.10
*5 AVI. (0 ~ 10V for 0 ~ 100.0%)
06-43 Sets the maximum input limitation of
062BH AVI Input Max % 100 0 100 AVI. (0 ~ 10V for 0 ~ 100.0%) 0x0012 8.10
*5
06-44 Sets the minimum input limitation of
062CH ACI Input Min % 20 0 100 0x0012 8.10
*5 ACI. (0 ~ 20mA for 0 ~ 100.0%)
Sets the maximum input limitation of
06-45 ACI. (0 ~ 20mA for 0 ~ 100.0%)
062DH ACI Input Max % 100 0 100 0x0012 8.10
*5
Sets the minimum input limitation of
06-46 AUI Input Min AUI. (-10 ~ 10V for -100.0 ~ 100.0%)
062EH % -100 -100 100 0x0092 8.10
*5

06-47 Sets the maximum input limitation of


062FH AUI Input Max % 100 -100 100 AUI. (-10 ~ 10V for -100.0 ~ 100.0%) 0x0092 8.10
*5
Sets the operation for when the AVI
error occurs. (The AVI input exceed
the range)
AVI Error 1: A warn is given and continue
06-48 0630H 0 0 2 0x2012 8.10
Action operation;
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the operation for when the ACI
error occurs. (The ACI input exceed
the range)
ACI Error 1: A warn is given and continue
06-49 0631H 0 0 2 0x2012 8.10
Action operation;
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the operation for when the AUI
errort occurs. (The AUI input
exceed the range)
AUI Error 1: A warn is given and continue
06-50 0632H 0 0 2 0x2012 8.10
Action operation;
2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
*5:06-42:max <= (06-43)-1; 06-44:max <= (06-45)-1; 06-46:max <= (06-47)-1; 06-43:min >= (06-42)+1; 06-45:min >=
(06-44)+1; 06-47:min >= (06-44)+1.

7-15
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.8. 07 - Lift function


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
07-01 Sets the diameter of the traction
0701H Diameter of motor mm 400 1 65535 0x0010
*3 sheave.
Sets the roping ratio of the
elevator.
1  [1:1]

% '
# % )
07-02
0702H Roping ratio 2 1 2 0x0010
*3 2  [1:2]

Used to set the time to perform


DC injection braking at start. Zero 8.1
07-04 0704H DCI Time at start sec 0.000 0.000 30.000 0x0310
speed is kept until DWELL 8.2
operation.
Used to set the time to perform
DC
Injection when the stop command
is given or the frequency
command is under 07-07. The DCI
8.1
07-05 0705H DCI Time at stop sec 0.000 0.000 30.000 timer for 07-05 and the brake 0x0310
8.2
delay timer for 07-13 start
simultaneously. Some time is need
for brake to get OFF completely,
07-05 should be higher than
07-13.
Sets the speed level at which the
DC injection/zero speed operation 8.1
07-07 0707H DCI Freq. at stop Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612
starts during stop. The DC 8.2
injection at stop starts from 07-07.
Sets the dwell time at start.
The dwell function can be used to 8.1
07-08 0708H Dwell Time at start sec 0.500 0.000 30.000 0x0310
improve the start behavior when 8.2
the static friction is high.
Sets the dwell frequency at start. 8.1
07-09 0709H Dwell Freq at start Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612
8.2
Sets the time delay from the run
delay has passed to the brake
release command is set.This timer
takes effect when compensation at
start is disabled (07-28 = 0). The
brake released command is set
until the brake open delay time has
passed from the run delay time has 8.1
07-12 070CH Brake Open Delay T sec 0.000 0.000 65.000 0x0310
passed. Although the inverter is in 8.2
running status when the run delay
time has passed, a delay is still
need for the inverter to get ready
to control motor. This timer can be
used to avoid impact causing by
that the inverter is not ready. It’ s
used to improve comfort at start.

7-16
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the time delay from the
inverter STOP command is given
until the brake close command is
8.1
07-13 070DH Brake Close Delay T sec 0.000 0.000 65.000 set. This timer can be used to 0x0310
8.2
avoid closing the brake when the
motor is still turning. It’ s used to
improve comfort at stop.
Sets the delay time from the run
signal input to the internal run
enable. If magnetic pole detection
has been done, the inverter will
start performing DC injection after 8.1
07-15 070FH RUN delay time sec 0.100 0.000 10.000 0x0310
the RUN delay time passed, or 8.2
else the inverter will start doing
magnetic pole detection. This
parameter is used to wait for the
output contactor switched ON.
Sets control output delay time
8.1
07-16 0710H MC Open Delay T sec 0.100 0.000 10.000 after stop of the magnetic 0x0310
8.2
contactor on the output side.
Sets the S-curve acceleration/
Inspect S curve
07-17 0711H sec 0.00 0.00 1.00 Deceleration time on inspection 0x0210 8.2
Time
operation.
Selects the inspection operation
07-18 0712H Inspect_mode 0 0 2 0x0010 8.2
mode.
Sets the frequency reference 1 of
07-19 0713H Inspect Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 2 of
07-20 0714H Inspect Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 3 of
07-21 0715H Inspect Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the leveling frequency 8.1
07-22 0716H Level Speed Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 0x1612
reference. 8.4
Sets the leveling Deceleration
mode. 8.1
07-23 0717H Level No. Method 1 0 1 0x2012
0: Ramp; 8.4
1: S-curve.
Sets the S-curve acceleration/ 8.1
07-24 0718H Level S curve Time sec 0.50 0.01 25.00 0x0210
Deceleration time at leveling. 8.4
Sets the Deceleration time at 8.1
07-25 0719H Leveling No.el time sec 5.00 0.01 60.00 0x0210
leveling. 8.4
Enable or Disable starting torque
compensation.
0: Disable;
07-28 071CH Torq Compen EN 0 0 2 0x2010 8.3
1: Enable;
2: Starting torque compensation
calibration.
Sets the source of starting torque
compensation reference.
Compen.Torq 0: Reserved;
07-29 071DH 3 0 3 0x2010 8.3
Source 1: Reserved;
2: Reserved;
3: Weighing.
Set the starting compensation
torque increasing time. (The time 8.1
07-30 071EH Torq Inc Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 to increase the compensation 0x0310 8.2
torque reference from 0 to 200% 8.3
of motor rated torque)
Set the stopping compensation
torque dereasing time. (The time 8.1
07-31 071FH Torq Dec. Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 to Decrease the compensation 0x0310 8.2
torque reference from 200% of 8.3
motor rated torque to 0)

7-17
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
The high byte of the elevator
07-32 0720H Absolute Posi Hi pls 0 0 32767 0x4012
absolute position.
The low byte of the elevator
07-33 0721H Absolute Posi Lo pls 0 0 65535 0x4012
absolute position.
Sets the frequency reference at
07-38 0726H Speed @Battery Op Hz 5.00 0 399.98 0x1612 8.6
battery operation.
Sets the elevator weighing value 1
07-39 0727H Elevator Weighing 1 % 25 0 200 0x0010 8.3
(load percentage).
Sets the elevator weighing value 2
07-40 0728H Elevator Weighing 2 % 75 0 200 0x0010 8.3
(load percentage).
Sets the AD value input with a
07-41 0729H Elevator W1 AD 512 0 4095 0x0010 8.3
load of weighing value 1.
Sets the AD value input with a
07-42 072AH Elevator W2 AD 1536 0 4095 0x0010 8.3
load of weighing value 2.
Pu value of upstairs running
07-43 072BH Up Compen. Torq 1 -27.5 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
with load of weighing value 1.
Pu value of ustairs running
07-44 072CH Up Compen. Torq 2 42.7 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
with load of weighing value 2.
Pu value of downstairs running
Down Compen.
07-45 072DH -42.7 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
Torq 1
with load of weighing value 1.
Pu value of downstairs running
Down Compen.
07-46 072EH 27.5 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
Torq 2
with load of weighing value 2.
Selects the source of weighing.
0: Analog input;
07-47 072FH Source of Weighing 0 0 4 1: Modbus communication; 0x2010 8.3
2: Reserved;
3: Multi-function input terminal.
Sets the compensation torque for
07-48 0730H Prev. U/D TorqErr 0 0 2000 the torque error related with the 0x0012
most recent operation direction.
The absolute position of elevator
07-49 0731H Posi @Weighing1 0 0 65535 with a load of weighing value 1 0x4012
for 07-39.(1 for 256 pulses)
The weighing value with 100
07-50 0732H Rope Weighing % 0 0 200 0x0012
meters of rope.
*3: Changes with Motor Code (05-10) Selection.

7-18
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.9. 09 - Communication Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the communication address for
an AC motor drive which is
controlled by RS-485 serial
09-00 0900H COMM Address 1 1 254 communication. And the 0x0010 9
communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different
and unique.
Sets the transmission speed of
COM 2 port between the RS485
09-06 0906H COM2 Baud Rate kbps 9.6 4.8 115.2 master (PC, DIGITAL 0x0110 9
OPERATOR, PLC, etc.) and AC
motor drive.
Sets the COM2 port response delay
09-10 time after AC drive receives
090AH COM2 silent time ms 5.0 0.5* 25.0 0x0110 9
*6 communication command for
Master turning to receive status.
*6: 09-10: min=3.5/(09-06)+0.5.
7.3.10. 10 - Speed Feedback Parameter
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
10-00 Encoder Sets the number of pulses for each cycle
0A00H 6000 1 40000 0x0010
*3 pulses of the PG control.
Sets the encoder input type.
0: Phase A leads in a forward run
command and phase B leads in areverse
run command.

PG input
10-01 0A01H 0 0 1 0x2010
setting 1: Phase B leads in a forward run
command and phase A leads in areverse
run command.

Sets the operation for when the PG fault


occurs.
PG fault 0: A warn is given and continue operation;
10-02 0A02H 2 0 2 0x2012
treatment 1: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
2: A fault is given and coast to stop.
Sets the detection time for PG error.
When encoder loss, encoder signal error,
PG Error pulse signal setting error or signal error, if
10-03 0A03H sec 1.0 0.0 10.0 0x0112
Detect T time exceeds the detection time for 10-03,
the PG error will occur. Refer to 10-02 for
PG fault treatment.
PG FBK
Sets the PG over speed level. (01-01 for
10-04 0A04H OverSPD % 115 0 120 0x0012
100%)
Level
OverSPD
10-05 0A05H sec 0.1 0.0 2.0 Sets the PG over speed detection time. 0x0112
Det.Time
Sets the operation for when the PG over
speed occurs.
Over SPD 0: A warn is given and continue operation;
10-06 0A06H 2 0 2 0x2012
Way 1: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
2: A fault is given and coast to stop.

7-19
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
PG DEV Sets the PG deviation level. (01-01 for
10-07 0A07H % 10 0 50 0x0012
Level 100%)
Sets the PG deviation detection time.If the
time when the difference between the
PG DEV frequency reference and feedback exceed
10-08 0A08H sec 0.5 0.0 10.0 0x0112
Detect Time the detection time for 10-08, the PG
deviation will occur. Refer to 10-09 for
PG deviation treatment.
Sets the operation for when the PG
deviation occurs.
PG DEV 1: A warn is given and continue operation;
10-09 0A09H 2 0 2 0x2012
treatment 2: A fault is given and Deceleration to
stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to stop.
10-11 ASR P Gain ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P)
0A0BH % 5.0 0.1 600.0 0x0112 8.5
*3 1 1
10-12 ASR I Gain ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I)
0A0CH sec 0.060 0.001 10.000 0x0312 8.5
*3 1 1
10-13 ASR P Gain ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P)
0A0DH % 10.0 1 600.0 0x0112 8.5
*3 2 2
10-14 ASR I Gain ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I)
0A0EH sec 0.030 0.001 10.000 0x0312 8.5
*3 2 2
ASR Switch
10-15 0A0FH Hz 0.20 0.00 399.98 ASR switch frequency 1 0x1612 8.5
Freq1
ASR Switch
10-16 0A10H Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 ASR switch frequency 2 0x1612 8.5
Freq2
SPD CMD
10-17 0A11H sec 0.000 0.000 1.000 Low Pass Filter time of ASR output 0x0312 8.5
Filter
10-18 System
0A12H kgm2 6.00 0.01 100.00 Sets the system inertia. 0x0210 8.5.5
*3 Interia
Acc
Feedforward gain of acceleration
10-19 0A13H Feedforword % 100 0 200 0x0012 8.5.5
reference.
P
Sets the filter time of torque observer.
Observer
10-20 0A14H sec 0.000 0.000 0.100 (When value is lower than 0.002, the 0x0312
Filter
Observer will stop observing)
Enables or disables the cogging torque
feedforward compensation function.
0: Disabled;
Cogging 1: Enabled.
10-21 0A15H 0 0 1 0x2012
Torq Cal EN When motor or encoder is changed, this
function should only be enabled when
cogging torque auto tunning had been
done.

7-20
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the ASR control parameters selection
mode.
0: Kp and Ki are generated as following
shown.
1: Kp = 10-11, Ki = 10-12;
2: Kp = 10-13, Ki = 10-14.
5

- . 0

ASR KpKi - . 0 6' (7


10-22 0A16H 0 0 2 ( 0x2012 8.5
Sel
- . /0 - . 40

- . 80

- . 0 6' (7
(

- . /0 - . 40

Sets the fuzzy control parameter 1 at


starting (Pu value of direct torque
Fuzzy ctrl
10-23 0A17H 0 0 5000 compensation step at starting zero speed 0x0012
Para1@STA
control depending on the feedback speed
fluctuation )

ASR P
10-24 0A18H % 0.0 0.0 600.0 Start ASR parameter Kp 0x0112
Gain@STA

ASR I
10-25 0A19H sec 0.030 0.001 10.000 Start ASR parameter Ki 0x0312
Gain@STA

*3: Changes with Motor Code (05-10) Selection.


7.3.11. 11-V/F Parameter
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Rated
11-01 0B01H Hz 50.00 0.01 399.98 Rated Output Frequency 0x1610
Output Freq.
Rated
11-02
0B02H Output V 380.0 0.0 480.0 Rated Output Frequency Voltage 0x0111
*2
Voltage
Mid Output
11-03 0B03H Hz 10.00 0.00 399.98 Middle Output Frequency 1 0x1610
Freq. 1
Mid Output
11-04 0B04H V 76.0 0.0 480.0 Middle Output Frequency 1 Voltage 0x0111
Voltage 1
Mid Output
11-05 0B05H Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 Middle Output Frequency 2 0x1610
Freq. 2
Mid Output
11-06 0B06H V 15.2 0.0 480.0 Middle Output Frequency 2 Voltage 0x0111
Voltage 2
Min Output
11-07 0B07H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 Minimum Output Frequency 0x1610
Freq.
Min Output
11-08 0B08H V 3.8 0.0 480.0 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0x0111
Voltage
*1:Changes with Model type of Drive (00-00) Selection.

7-21
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

7.3.12. 12 - Fault Record


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Present Fault Record
00: No fault;
40: Magnetic polde detection error;
41: Over current;
43: Over voltage;
44: IGBT over-temperature;
45: Inveter over-load fault;
46: Motor over-load fault;
47: External fault input;
54: Ground fault;
55: Low voltage;
56: EEPROM fault 1;
57: EEPROM fault 2;
63: Phase loss;
70: Over speed;
71: Autotunning fault
72: No PG card
74: Fan failure;
12-00 0C00H 1st Fault Record 0 0 65535 75: PG error 1; 0x0008
76: PG error 2;
77: PG error 3;
78: PG Z pulse loss;
79: Speed deviation;
80: Brake unit short-circuit;
81: Brake unit broken;
82: IGBT over current;
86: Current of U phase error;
87: Current of V phase error;
88: Current of W phase error;
89: CPU fault;
90: AVI fault;
91: ACI fault;
92: AUI fault;
93: TH1 error;
100: Inverter over-load warn;
101: Motor over-load warn;
103: IGBT over-temperature warn;
12-01 0C01H 2nd Fault Record 0 0 65535 Second Most Recent Fault Record 0x0008
12-02 0C02H 3rd Fault Record 0 0 65535 Third Most Recent Fault Record 0x0008
12-03 0C03H 4th Fault Record 0 0 65535 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record 0x0008
12-04 0C04H 5th Fault Record 0 0 65535 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record 0x0008
12-05 0C05H 6th Fault Record 0 0 65535 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record 0x0008
Clear fault records.
12-06 0C06H Clear all err record 0 0 1 0: No function; 0x6010
1: Clear all fault record;
Frequency reference when most
12-07 0C07H Ref freq at fault Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
recent fault occurs.
Output frequency when most recent
12-08 0C08H Output freq at fault Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
fault occurs.
Motor speed at Motor speed when most recent fault
12-09 0C09H Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
fault occurs.
Output current when most recent
12-10 0C0AH Output I at fault Amp 0.00 0.00 655.35 0x0208
fault occurs.
Output voltage reference when
12-11 0C0BH Out Vol ref at fault V 0.0 0.0 6553.5 0x0108
most recent fault occurs.
DCBus voltage when most recent
12-12 0C0CH DCbus Vol at fault V 0.0 0.0 6553.5 0x0108
fault occurs.
Temperature at Temperature of heatsink when most
12-13 0C0DH oC -32767 0 32767 0x0088
fault recent fault occurs.

7-22
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Torque reference when most recent
12-14 0C0EH Torq ref at fault % 0.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0188
fault occurs.(100% for rated torque)
Input terminal status when most
12-15 0C0FH Input Term at fault 0 0 65535 0x0048
recent fault occurs.
Output Term at Output terminal status when most
12-16 0C10H 0 0 65535 0x0048
fault recent fault occurs.
Operation status when most recent
12-17 0C11H Op status at fault 0 0 65535 0x0048
fault occurs.
Cumulative operation time
Cumu OpT M at
12-18 0C12H min 0 0 65535 (minitue) when most recent fault 0x0008
fault
occurs.
Cumu OpT D at Cumulative operation time (day)
12-19 0C13H day 0 0 65535 0x0008
fault when most recent fault occurs.

7.3.13. 13 - RAM Map Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the access mode of RAM MAP
RAMMAP Access parameters.
13-00 0D00H 1 0 1 0x6012
Mode 0: Access data at mapped address.
1: Access or set mapping address.
Sets the RAM mapping address
(0x2410: speed
command ;0x2411:speed
feedback;0x2412: output current;
0x2413: speed unit; 0x2414:
13-01 0D01H RAM Mapping 01 9232 9232 9288 load;0x2415: unnomal code; 0x0052
0x2416: position high bit; 0x2417:
position low bit;0x2418: run
state;0x241E: version: year
month ;0x241F: version: day)
Sets the RAM mapping address
(0x2420:U aphase instant
current;0x2421: W aphase instant
current;0X2422:
13-02 0D02H RAM Mapping 02 9233 9232 9288 tempreture1;0x2423: 0x0052
temprure2;0x2424:AVI AD
value;0x2425: ACI AD value;
ox2426: AUI AD value; 0x2427:
DC voltage)
Sets the RAM mapping address
 0x2428: digital input terminal;
0x2429: Electric horn;0x242A:
machinal horn;0x242B:Q feedback
13-03 0D03H RAM Mapping 03 9234 9232 9288 0x0052
current; 0x242C: D feedback
current 0x242D: output power
0x242E: output frency;0x242F:
target speed command; 
Sets the RAM mapping address
(0x2430: Q current
command ;0x2431: D current
command 0x2433: Q votage
13-04 0D04H RAM Mapping 04 9235 9232 9288 command ;0x2434:D votage 0x0052
command; 0x2435: output
votage ;0x2436: pulse input;
0x2437: dignal output terminal
state)

7-23
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the RAM mapping address
 0x2438  PortA  0x2439  PortB 
13-05 0D05H RAM Mapping 05 9236 9232 9288 0x243B  PortD  0x243C  PortE H  0x0052
0x243D  PortE L  0x243E  run
time  0x243F  run days "
Sets the RAM mapping address
 0x2440: S curve turning
speed;0x2441: Micro deceleration
distance high speed
operation;0x2442: Micro
deceleration distance low speed
operation;0x2443: total reduce
13-06 0D06H RAM Mapping 06 9237 9232 9288 0x0052
distance high bits0x24443: total
reduce low bits ; 0x2444: Minimum
distance running high bits;0x2445:
the smallest distance; 0x2446: the
smalecest distance loe bit;0x2447:
Pole pole angle estimation:0x2448:
Pole pole angle estimation 
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-07 0D07H RAM Mapping 07 9238 9232 9288 0x0052
13-07
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-08 0D08H RAM Mapping 08 9239 9232 9288 0x0052
13-08
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-09 0D09H RAM Mapping 09 9240 9232 9288 0x0052
13-09
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-10 0D0AH RAM Mapping 10 9241 9232 9288 0x0052
13-10
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-11 0D0BH RAM Mapping 11 9242 9232 9288 0x0052
13-11
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-12 0D0CH RAM Mapping 12 9243 9232 9288 0x0052
13-12
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-13 0D0DH RAM Mapping 13 9244 9232 9288 0x0052
13-13
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-14 0D0EH RAM Mapping 14 9245 9232 9288 0x0052
13-14
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-15 0D0FH RAM Mapping 15 9246 9232 9288 0x0052
13-15
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-16 0D10H RAM Mapping 16 9247 9232 9288 0x0052
13-16
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-17 0D11H RAM Mapping 17 9248 9232 9288 0x0052
13-17
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-18 0D12H RAM Mapping 18 9249 9232 9288 0x0052
13-18
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-19 0D13H RAM Mapping 19 9250 9232 9288 0x0052
13-19
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-20 0D14H RAM Mapping 20 9251 9232 9288 0x0052
13-20
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-21 0D15H RAM Mapping 21 9252 9232 9288 0x0052
13-21
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-22 0D16H RAM Mapping 22 9253 9232 9288 0x0052
13-22
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-23 0D17H RAM Mapping 23 9254 9232 9288 0x0052
13-23
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-24 0D18H RAM Mapping 24 9255 9232 9288 0x0052
13-24
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-25 0D19H RAM Mapping 25 9256 9232 9288 0x0052
13-25
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-26 0D1AH RAM Mapping 26 9257 9232 9288 0x0052
13-26
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-27 0D1BH RAM Mapping 27 9258 9232 9288 0x0052
13-27
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-28 0D1CH RAM Mapping 28 9259 9232 9288 0x0052
13-28

7-24
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-29 0D1DH RAM Mapping 29 9260 9232 9288 0x0052
13-29
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-30 0D1EH RAM Mapping 30 9261 9232 9288 0x0052
13-30
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-31 0D1FH RAM Mapping 31 9262 9232 9288 0x0052
13-31
Sets the RAM mapping address of
13-32 0D20H RAM Mapping 32 9263 9232 9288 0x0052
13-32

7.3.14. 14 - User Define Parameter


Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the access mode of User Define
parameters.
14-00 0E00H USER Access Mode 1 0 1 0x6012
0: Access data at mapped address.
1: Access or set mapping address.
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-01 0E01H USER Mapping 01 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-01
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-02 0E02H USER Mapping 02 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-02
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-03 0E03H USER Mapping 03 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-03
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-04 0E04H USER Mapping 04 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-04
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-05 0E05H USER Mapping 05 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-05
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-06 0E06H USER Mapping 06 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-06
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-07 0E07H USER Mapping 07 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-07
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-08 0E08H USER Mapping 08 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-08
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-09 0E09H USER Mapping 09 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-09
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-10 0E0AH USER Mapping 10 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-10
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-11 0E0BH USER Mapping 11 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-11
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-12 0E0CH USER Mapping 12 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-12
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-13 0E0DH USER Mapping 13 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-13
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-14 0E0EH USER Mapping 14 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-14
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-15 0E0FH USER Mapping 15 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-15
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-16 0E10H USER Mapping 16 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-16
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-17 0E11H USER Mapping 17 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-17
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-18 0E12H USER Mapping 18 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-18
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-19 0E13H USER Mapping 19 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-19
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-20 0E14H USER Mapping 20 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-20
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-21 0E15H USER Mapping 21 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-21
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-22 0E16H USER Mapping 22 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-22
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-23 0E17H USER Mapping 23 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-23

7-25
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-24 0E18H USER Mapping 24 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-24
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-25 0E19H USER Mapping 25 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-25
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-26 0E1AH USER Mapping 26 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-26
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-27 0E1BH USER Mapping 27 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-27
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-28 0E1CH USER Mapping 28 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-28
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-29 0E1DH USER Mapping 29 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-29
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-30 0E1EH USER Mapping 30 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-30
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-31 0E1FH USER Mapping 31 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-31
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-32 0E20H USER Mapping 32 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-32
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-33 0E21H USER Mapping 33 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-33
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-34 0E22H USER Mapping 34 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-34
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-35 0E23H USER Mapping 35 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-35
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-36 0E24H USER Mapping 36 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-36
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-37 0E25H USER Mapping 37 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-37
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-38 0E26H USER Mapping 38 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-38
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-39 0E27H USER Mapping 39 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-39
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-40 0E28H USER Mapping 40 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-40
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-41 0E29H USER Mapping 41 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-41
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-42 0E2AH USER Mapping 42 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-42
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-43 0E2BH USER Mapping 43 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-43
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-44 0E2CH USER Mapping 44 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-44
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-45 0E2DH USER Mapping 45 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-45
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-46 0E2EH USER Mapping 46 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-46
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-47 0E2FH USER Mapping 47 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-47
Sets the USER mapping address of
14-48 0E30H USER Mapping 48 0 0 65535 0x0052
14-48

7-26
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8. Functions
8.1. Control Sequence
8.1.1. Related Parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Used to set the time to perform DC
injection braking at start. Zero 8.1
07-04 0704H DCI Time at start sec 0.000 0.000 30.000 0x0310
speed is kept until DWELL 8.2
operation.
Used to set the time to perform DC
Injection when the stop command
is given or the frequency command
is under 07-07. The DCI timer for
8.1
07-05 0705H DCI Time at stop sec 0.000 0.000 30.000 07-05 and the brake delay timer 0x0310
8.2
for 07-13 start simultaneously.
Some time is need for brake to get
OFF completely, 07-05 should be
higher than 07-13.
Sets the speed level at which the
DC injection/zero speed operation 8.1
07-07 0707H DCI Freq. at stop Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612
starts during stop. The DC 8.2
injection at stop starts from 07-07.
Sets the dwell time at start.
8.1
The dwell function can be used to
07-08 0708H Dwell Time at start sec 0.500 0.000 30.000 0x0310 8.2
improve the start behavior when
the static friction is high.
8.1
07-09 0709H Dwell Freq at start Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 Sets the dwell frequency at start. 0x1612
8.2
Sets the time delay from the run
delay has passed to the brake
release command is set.This timer
takes effect when compensation at
start is disabled (07-28 = 0). The
brake released command is set
until the brake open delay time has
passed from the run delay time has 8.1
07-12 070CH Brake Open Delay T sec 0.000 0.000 65.000 0x0310
passed. Although the inverter is in 8.2
running status when the run delay
time has passed, a delay is still
need for the inverter to get ready to
control motor. This timer can be
used to avoid impact causing by
that the inverter is not ready. It’ s
used to improve comfort at start.
Sets the time delay from the
inverter STOP command is given
until the brake close command is
8.1
07-13 070DH Brake Close Delay T sec 0.000 0.000 65.000 set. This timer can be used to avoid 0x0310
8.2
closing the brake when the motor
is still turning. It’ s used to improve
comfort at stop.
Sets the delay time from the run
signal input to the internal run
enable. If magnetic pole detection
has been done, the inverter will
start performing DC injection after 8.1
07-15 070FH RUN delay time sec 0.100 0.000 10.000 0x0310
the RUN delay time passed, or else 8.2
the inverter will start doing
magnetic pole detection. This
parameter is used to wait for the
output contactor switched ON.

8-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets control output delay time after
8.1
07-16 0710H MC Open Delay T sec 0.100 0.000 10.000 stop of the magnetic contactor on 0x0310
8.2
the output side.
Sets the S-curve acceleration/
07-17 0711H Inspect S curve Time sec 0.00 0.00 1.00 Deceleration time on inspection 0x0210 8.2
operation.

Sets the leveling frequency 8.1


07-22 0716H Level Speed Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 0x1612
reference. 8.4

Sets the leveling Deceleration


mode. 8.1
07-23 0717H Level No. Method 1 0 1 0x2012
0: Ramp; 8.4
1: S-curve.
Sets the S-curve acceleration/ 8.1
07-24 0718H Level S curve Time sec 0.50 0.01 25.00 0x0210
Deceleration time at leveling. 8.4
Sets the Deceleration time at 8.1
07-25 0719H Leveling No.el time sec 5.00 0.01 60.00 0x0210
leveling. 8.4
Set the starting compensation
torque increasing time. (The time 8.1
07-30 071EH Torq INC Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 to increase the compensation 0x0310 8.2
torque reference from 0 to 200% of 8.3
motor rated torque)
Set the stopping compensation
torque Decreasing time. (The time 8.1
07-31 071FH Torq DEC Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 to Decrease the compensation 0x0310 8.2
torque reference from 200% of 8.3
motor rated torque to 0)

8.1.2. Operation Sequence


1) Multi-step speed reference from input terminal/ Stop command from host controller

f5 f4=pr[07-09]

frequency ref f6

f4=pr[07-09] f6
f5

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal input bit0
REV
terminal inputbit1
MI1 step1
terminal input bit2
MI2 step2
terminal input bit3
MI3 step 3
terminal input bit4
MI4 inspection
terminal input bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t5 t6 t5 t6
t2=pr[07-04]
t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t4=pr[07-08]
t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t11=pr[07-16]
t4=pr[07-08] t7 t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-1 Multi-Step Speed Reference from Input Terminal/ Stop Command from Host Controller
A. Time zone for operation sequence :
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.

8-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t4: DWELL at start operation;
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t6: The speed is Decreased to the leveling speed and is kept parameter until the stop signal is given.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the zero-speed level
t8: Zero-speed operation at stop.
t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.
B. The functions of MI1~MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.
C. If select the multi-function terminals as the frequency reference source (00-01 = 3), maximum 15 preset speed
steps set in 01-23~01-37 can be selected using 4 binary coded multi-function contact inputs.
D. FWD,REV,MI1,MI2,MI3,MI4,RUNNING,BRAKE,MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,07-05,
07-13.

2) Multi-step speed reference from input terminal/ Stop command by combination of stop speed Decelation and time
characteristic

f7=pr[07-07]
f7=pr[07-07]
f5 f4=pr[07-09]
frequency ref f6

f4=pr[07-09] f6
f5

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal input bit0
REV
terminal input bit1
MI1 step 1
terminal input bit2
MI2 step 2
terminal input bit3
MI3 step 3
terminal input bit4
MI4 inspection
terminal input bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t5 t6 t5 t6
t2=pr[07-04]
t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t4=pr[07-08]
t7 t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t7 t11=pr[07-16]
t4=pr[07-08] t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-2 Stop Command by Combination of Stop Speed Decelation and Time Characteristic
A. Time zone for operation sequence :
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.
t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t4: DWELL at start operation;
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t6: The speed is Decreased to the leveling speed and is kept parameter until the stop signal is given.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the DCI stop reference level
t8: The speed is Decreased to zero, zero-speed operation at stop.
t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero based on the torque compensation time at stop.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.

8-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

B. The functions of MI1~MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.


C. If select the multi-function terminals as the frequency reference source (00-01 = 3), maximum 16 preset speed
steps set in 01-23~01-37 can be selected using 4 binary coded multi-function contact inputs.
D. FWD, REV, MI1, MI2, MI3, MI4, RUNNING, BRAKE, MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,07-05,
07-13.
8.2. Inspection Run
8.2.1. Related Parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the acceleration time to
accelerate from 0 Hz to the
01-13 010DH JOG Acc time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 0x0212 8.2
maximum output frequency when
inspection run mode is activated.
Sets the Deceleration time to
Decelerate from the maximum
01-14 010EH JOG Dec.time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 0x0212 8.2
output frequency to 0 Hz when
inspection run mode is activated.
Sets the frequency reference when
01-15 010FH JOG Frequency Hz 6.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection run mod is activated.
Sets the S-curve acceleration/
07-17 0711H Inspect S curve Time sec 0.00 0.00 1.00 Deceleration time on inspection 0x0210 8.2
operation.
Selects the inspection operation
07-18 0712H Inspect_mode 0 0 2 0x0010 8.2
mode.
Sets the frequency reference 1 of
07-19 0713H Inspect Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 2 of
07-20 0714H Inspect Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 3 of
07-21 0715H Inspect Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.

The inspection run mode is set by 07-18. For example: 02-01=1(The function of terminal 1 is set to multi-step
speed reference code1), 02-02=2(The function of terminal 2 is set to multi-step speed reference code2), 02-03=3(The
function of terminal 3 is set to multi-step speed reference code3), 02-04=6(The function of terminal 4 is set to
inspection signal), all other terminals are not set to multi-step speed reference.In inspection run, the speed reference
code are mapped to the inspection multi-step speed( 07-19~07-21) but not normal multi-step speed(01-23 to 01-27), as
shown in fig 6-3.If 07-18=0.When all the signals to the terminals functioned as multi-step reference(MI1, MI2, MI3) is
not input , the inverter Decrease to zero. If 07-18=1, when inspection signal is input to terminal 4, the inverter starts to
inspection run.The inspection frequency reference is set by 01-15.When the signal of terminal 4 is removed, the inverter
Decrease to zero. If 07-18=2, when inspection signal is input to terminal 4, the inverter starts to inspection run.The
inspection frequency reference is get combining of ther signal of MI1 and MI2. Refer to Fig 8-6 to Fig 8-9 for the
sequence.The acceleration/Deceleration time characteristic is shown inFig 8-4.

( 9 ( '
(
(
. .: ;
9
. .: .
9
.:

Fig 8-3 Relation of Step Code and Inspection Frequency Reference

8-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-4 Inspection Operation Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristic


When applied in elevator inspection, the inverter should be wired as shown following.

%%

' 1
7

5
$#
5
"
5
9
58
9
5/
9
54
98
%

Fig 8-5 Wiring of Inspection Run for Elevator Inspection Run


8.2.2. Inspection Run Sequence
1) Inspection run mode 1/ Stop command from host controller

frequency ref f5=pr[01-15]

f5=pr[01-15]

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal input bit0
REV
terminal input bit1
MI1 step 1
terminal input bit2
MI2 step 2
terminal input bit3
MI3 step 3
terminal input bit4
MI4
terminal input bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t5 t5
t2=pr[07-04]
t3=k1 * pr[07-30]
t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t7 t11=pr[07-16]
t7 t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-6 Inspection Run Mode 0/ Stop Command from Host Controller
A. Time zone for operation sequence
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.
t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the zero-speed level. (When the signal of terminal MI3/MI2/MI1 is removed)

8-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

t8: Zero-speed operation at stop.


t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.
B. The functions of MI1-MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.
C. If inspection run mode 0 is selected (07-18=0), the frequency reference is set by 01-15.
D. FWD, REV, MI1, MI2, MI3, MI4, RUNNING, BRAKE, MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,07-05,
07-13.

2) Inspection run mode 1/ Stop command from host controller

frequency ref f5=pr[01-15]

f5=pr[01-15]

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal input bit0
REV
terminal input bit1

MI4
terminal input bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t2=pr[07-04] t5 t5

t3=k1 * pr[07-30]
t7 t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t7 t11=pr[07-16]
t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-7 Inspection Run Mode 1/ Stop Command from Host Controller
A. Time zone for operation sequence
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.
t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the zero-speed level. (When the inspection signal is removed)
t8: Zero-speed operation at stop.
t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.
B. The functions of MI1~MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.
C. If inspection run mode 1 is selected (07-18=1), the frequency reference is set by 01-15.
D. FWD, REV, MI1, MI2, MI3, MI4, RUNNING, BRAKE, MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,07-05,
07-13.

8-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

3) Inspection run mode 2/ Stop command from host controller

frequency ref f5

f5

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal status bit0
REV
terminal status bit1
MI1
terminal status bit2
MI2
terminal status bit3

MI4
terminal status bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t2=pr[07-04] t5 t5

t3=k1 * pr[07-30]
t7 t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t7 t11=pr[07-16]
t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-8 Inspection Run Mode 2/ Stop Command from Host Controller
A. Time zone for operation sequence
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.
t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the zero-speed level. (When the zero frequency reference is given)
t8: Zero-speed operation at stop.
t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.
B. The functions of MI1~MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.
C. If inspection run mode 2 is selected (07-18=2), the the inspection frequency reference is get combining of the
signal of MI1 and MI2 and the frequency step set in 07-18~07-20.
D. FWD, REV, MI1, MI2, MI3, MI4, RUNNING, BRAKE, MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,
07-05, 07-13.

4) Inspection run mode 0/ Stop command given by combination of stop speed Decelation and time characteristic

8-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

f7=pr[07-07]
f7=pr[07-07]
frequency ref f5=pr[01-15]

f5=pr[01-15]

Torqc Torqc

torque ref

FWD
terminal input bit0
REV
terminal input bit1
MI1
terminal input bit2
MI2
terminal input bit3
MI3
terminal input bit4
MI4
terminal input bit5

RUNNING
control signal bit1
BRAKE
control signal bit8
MC
control signal bit12

t1=pr[07-15]+t0
t2=pr[07-04] t5 t5

t3=k1 * pr[07-30]
t7 t11=pr[07-16] t2=pr[07-04] t7 t11=pr[07-16]
t10=k2 * pr[07-31] t3=k1 * pr[07-30] t10=k2 *
t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05] t1=pr[07-15]+t0 t9=pr[07-13] t8=pr[07-05]

Fig 8-9 Stop Command Given By Combination of Stop Speed Decelation and Time Characteristic
A. Time zone for operation sequence
t1: Run command is given, the inverter starts to run.
t2: zero-speed operation at start.
t3: compensation torque is produced from zero based on the torque compensation time at start.
t5: The speed is increased to the selected speed and is kept parameter until the leveling speed is selected.
t7: The speed is Decreased to the zero-speed level. (From when the signal of terminal MI3/MI2/MI1 is removed to
when the frequency reach the DCI stop level)
t8: Zero-speed operation at stop.
t9: Brake close deay time. When the time has elapsed, the brake release command is removed.
t10: Torque Decrease to zero.
t11: Output contactor open delay.When the time has elapsed, the contactor control signal is released.
B. The functions of MI1~MI4 are set by 02-01~02-04.
C. If inspection run mode 0 is selected (07-18=0), the frequency reference is set by 01-15.
D. FWD, REV, MI1, MI2, MI3, MI4, RUNNING, BRAKE, MC in the fiqure are all binary value.
E. At initial run after power supplied, t0 = magnetic pole detection time, otherwise, t0 = 0.
F. t3 = k1*pr[07-30], k1 = torque reference at acceleration start of torque compensation/ 200% of motor rated torque
G. k2 = torque reference at Deceleration start of torque compensation/200% of motor rated torque.
Note: If 00-13 is set to 1(Coast to stop), the inverter will stop the PWM ouput immediately neglecting 07-31,07-05,
07-13.

8-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.3. Weighing Compensation


8.3.1. Related Parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Multi-function input terminal 1
function selection
0: No function;
1: Multi-step speed reference 1;
2: Multi-step speed reference 2;
3: Multi-step speed reference 3;
4: Multi-step speed reference 4;
02-01 0201H MultiFunction In 1 1 0 11 0x2010
5: External fault (EF) input;
6: Inspection run;
7: Fault/Warn external reset;
8: Battery operation;
9: Weighing signal 1;
10:Weighing signal 2;
11:Weighing signal 3.
Multi-function input terminal 2
02-02 0202H MultiFunction In 2 2 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Multi-function input terminal 3
02-03 0203H MultiFunction In 3 3 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Multi-function input terminal 4
02-04 0204H MultiFunction In 4 4 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Multi-function input terminal 5
02-05 0205H MultiFunction In 5 0 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Multi-function input terminal 6
02-06 0206H MultiFunction In 6 0 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Multi-function input terminal 7
02-07 0207H MultiFunction In 7 0 0 11 0x2010
function selection
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AVI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 -
10V(varies according to 03-09 )
for 0-maximum output
8.3
03-00 0300H AVI Input setting 1 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation,
0 - 10V(varies according to
03-09 ) for 0~maximim ouput
torque (04-02);
4: Reserved.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal ACI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~
10V/ 0 - 20mA(varies according
to 03-10 ) for 0 - maximum
8.3
03-01 0301H ACI Input setting 0 0 4 output frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation,
0 - 10V / 0 - 20mA(varies
according to 03-10) for
-maximim ouput torque;
4: Reserved.

8-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AUI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~
10V/ 0 - -10V(varies according
to 03-11 ) for 0 ~ maximum
8.3
03-02 0302H AUI Input setting 0 0 4 output frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation,
0-10V/0- -10V(varies according
to 03-11) for 0~maximim ouput
torque;
4: Reserved.
Enable or Disable starting torque
compensation.
0: Disable;
07-28 071CH Torq Compen EN 0 0 2 0x2010 8.3
1: Enable;
2: Starting torque compensation
calibration.
Sets the source of starting torque
compensation reference.
Compen.Torq 0: Reserved;
07-29 071DH 3 0 3 0x2010 8.3
Source 1: Reserved;
2: Reserved ;
3: Weighing.
Set the starting compensation
torque increasing time. (The
8.1
time to increase the
07-30 071EH Torq INC Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 0x0310 8.2
compensation torque reference
8.3
from 0 to 200% of motor rated
torque)
Set the stopping compensation
torque Decreasing time. (The
8.1
time to Decrease the
07-31 071FH Torq NO. Time sec 0.500 0.001 5.000 0x0310 8.2
compensation torque reference
8.3
from 200% of motor rated
torque to 0)
Elevator Weighing Sets the elevator weighing value
07-39 0727H % 25 0 200 0x0010 8.3
1 1 (load percentage).
Elevator Weighing Sets the elevator weighing value
07-40 0728H % 75 0 200 0x0010 8.3
2 2 (load percentage).
Sets the AD value input with a
07-41 0729H Elevator W1 AD 512 0 4095 0x0010 8.3
load of weighing value 1.
Sets the AD value input with a
07-42 072AH Elevator W2 AD 1536 0 4095 0x0010 8.3
load of weighing value 2.
Pu value of upstairs running
Up Compen. Torq
07-43 072BH % -27.5 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
1
with load of weighing value 1.
Pu value of ustairs running
Up Compen. Torq
07-44 072CH % 42.7 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
2
with load of weighing value 2.
Pu value of downstairs running
Down Compen.
07-45 072DH % -42.7 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
Torq 1
with load of weighing value 1.
Pu value of downstairs running
Down Compen.
07-46 072EH % 27.5 -200.0 200.0 compensation torque for elevator 0x0192 8.3
Torq 2
with load of weighing value 2.
Selects the source of weighing.
0: Analog input;
Source of 1: Modbus communication;
07-47 072FH 0 0 4 0x2010 8.3
Weighing 2: Reserved;
3: Multi-function input terminal.
4:Torque current control

8-10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.3.2. Calibration Step of Torque Compesation Value at Start


If torque compensation at start function is enabled and the source of torque compensation is the weighing value
([07-29] = 3), it’ s necessary to do calibration of torque compensation value at start before initial run. This inverter
support semi-automatic and manual calibration of torque compensation value at start.
When weighing value comes from analog input ([07-47] = 0), both semi-automatic and manual calibration are
supported.Please refer to the illustration of semi-automatic calibration when weighing value comes from Modbus
communication ([07-47] = 1) for automatic calibration details.The manual calibration steps are listed as shown
following.
1) Land the cabin on the intermediate floor (If the rope can be weighted, the cabin can be landed on any floor, except
on the top or buttom).
2) Set [00-06] to 0(Iqref displayed in multi-function display mode).Set the operator to multi-function display mode.
Set the inspection speed ([01-15]) to 0~1% of rated speed.
3) Set [07-39] to 0% when there is no load in the cabin. [07-41] will be updated automatically.
4) Place heavy weight (more than 60% of rated weight, escaping 75%) into the cabin.Set the weight into [07-40].
[07-42] will be updated automatically.
5) Perform up-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-44] when speed stable.*
6) Perform down-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-46] when speed stable.*
7) Unload the cabin to 0% weight.
8) Perform up-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-43] when speed stable.*
9) Perform down-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-45] when speed stable.*
10) The internal AD-weighing value characteristic is obtained according to [07-39], [07-40], [07-41], [07-42].
11) The internal up-direction weighing-iq characteristic is obtained according to [07-39], [07-40], [07-43], [07-44].
12) The internal down-direction weighing-iq characteristic is obtained according to [07-39], [07-40], [07-45], [07-46].
13) Calibration finished.

Semi-automatic calibration is recommended because it’ s simplier than manual method when weighing value comes
from analog input or modbus communication ([07-47] = 0 or 1). Steps are listed as shown following.
1) Land the cabin on the intermediate floor (If the rope can be weighted, the cabin can be landed on any floor, except
on the top or buttom).Place no-load into the cabin. If [07-47] = 0, sets 0 into [07-39] and [07-41] will be updated
automatically.
2) Set [07-28] to 2.Perform up-direction inspection run for 5s, then, down-direction for 5s.Check if [07-28] is
1.[07-28]= 1 indicates calibration under light-weight success.The related parameters including [07-39],
[07-41](updated only when [07-47] = 0), [07-43], [07-45] will be updated automatically.
3) Place heavy-weight load into the cabin (load > 60%, escaping 75%), If [07-47] = 0, sets the weight into [07-40] and
[07-42] will be updated automatically.
4) Set [07-28] to 2.Perform up-direction inspection run for 5s, then, down-direction for 5s.Check if [07-28] is
1.[07-28]= 1 indicates calibration under light-weight success.The related parameters including [07-40],
[07-42](update only when [07-47] = 0), [07-44], [07-46] will update automatically.
5) Calibration finished.

When weighing value comes from multi-function input ([07-47] = 3), manual calibration is recommended.Steps are
listed as shown following.
1) Land the cabin on the intermediate floor (If the rope can be weighted, the cabin can be landed on any floor, except
on the top or buttom).
2) Set [00-06] to 0(Iqref displayed in multi-function display mode).Set the operator to multi-function display mode.
Set the inspection speed ([01-15]) to 0~1% of rated speed.
3) Set [07-39] to 0% when there is no load in the cabin.
4) Place heavy weight (more than 60% of rated weight) into the cabin.Set the weight into [07-40].
5) Perform up-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-44] when speed stable.*
6) Perform down-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-46] when speed stable.*
7) Unload the cabin.
8) Perform up-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-43] when speed stable.*
9) Perform down-direction inspection run. Record the displayed value and set it into [07-45] when speed stable.*
10) The internal up-direction weighing-iq characteristic is obtained according to [07-39], [07-40], [07-43], [07-44].
11) The internal down-direction weighing-iq characteristic is obtained according to [07-39], [07-40], [07-45], [07-46].
12) Calibration finished.
*:It’ s suggested to record the displayed value when the cabin is at the same position.

If the source of weighing is the analog input terminal (07-47 = 0), when calibration finished, the internal
AD-weighing value characteristic will be obtained according to 07-39, 07-40, 07-41, 07-42.

8-11
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-10 AD-Weighing Value Characteristic


The up-direction weighing-iq characteristic will be obtained according to 07-39, 07-40, 07-43, 07-44.

Fig 8-11 Up-Direction Weighing-Iq Characteristic


The down-direction weighing-iq characteristic will be obtained according to 07-39, 07-40, 07-45, 07-46.

Fig 8-12 Down-Direction Weighing-Iq Characteristic


07-43~07-46 can be tuned for improve comfort avoiding impat at start after calibration.
8.3.3. Control Diagram of Weighing Compensation

Fig 8-13 Control Diagram of Weighing Compensation


Fig 8-13 shows the control diagram when the weighing value is set as the torque compensation at start (07-29 = 3).
When weighing value comes from digital input, the relation between digital input and weighing is figured

8-12
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

following. In this figure, multi-function terminal MI1, MI2 and MI3is set to weighing signal 1, 2 and 3 separately
([02-01] = 9, [02-02] = 10, [02-03] = 11).

9 9 9

. . . -. 0
1 * -. .0 2 -. 0,>
. . -. .0
' * -. ;0 2 -. .0,>
. <= -. ;0
*. ;,> 1
<= <=
'
=?.

Fig 8-14 relation between digital input and weighing


The torque compensation ramps to increase avoiding impact as shown below.

Fig 8-15 Weighing Compensation Time Characteristic


Please refer to 8.1 and 8.2 for the torque compensation sequence. 8.10 show the detail relationship between
AD-weighing value and parameter setting.
8.4. Acceleraion/Deceleration Characteristic
8.4.1. Related parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the unit of the frequency
type parameters
0: Hz;
01-00 0100H Frequency units 0 0 3 0x2010
1: rpm;
2: m/s;
3: m/min
Sets the maximum output
01-01 0101H Max Output Freq. Hz 60.00 0.01 399.98 0x1610
frequency
Sets the acceleration time 1 to
01-05 0105H 1st Accel time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 accelerate from 0 Hz to the 0x0212 8.4
maximum output frequency.
Sets the deceleration time 1 to
01-06 0106H 1st Decel time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 decelerate from the maximum 0x0212 8.4
output frequency to 0 Hz.
S curve Accel time Sets S-curve characteristic
01-17 0111H sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
1 time at acceleration start.
S curve Accel time Sets characteristic time at
01-18 0112H sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
2 acceleration end.
S curve Decel time Sets S-curve characteristic
01-19 0113H sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
1 time at deceleration start.
S curve Decel time Sets S-curve characteristic
01-20 0114H sec 2.00 0.01 25.00 0x0212 8.4
2 time at deceleration end.
Sets the leveling frequency
07-22 0716H Level Speed Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 0x1612 8.4
reference.
Sets the leveling Deceleration
mode.
07-23 0717H Level No. Method 1 0 1 0x2012 8.4
0: Ramp;
1: S-curve.

8-13
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Level S curve Sets the S-curve acceleration/
07-24 0718H sec 0.50 0.01 25.00 0x0210 8.4
Time Deceleration time at leveling.
Leveling No.el Sets the Deceleration time at
07-25 0719H sec 5.00 0.01 60.00 0x0210 8.4
time leveling.

8.4.2. Acceleraion/Deceleration Characteristic


At normal operation, the acceleration/deleration characteristic is set by 01-05, 01-06. The acceleration time is that
to accelerate from 0.00Hz to the maximum output frequency (01-01). The deceleration time is that to decelerate from
the maximum output frequency to 0.00Hz.
S-curve time (01-17 to 01-20, 07-24) can be set to avoid impact at start or at stop.The acceleration/deceleration
time should be greater than S-curve time. It’ s recommented to set the S-curve greater than 1.2s.

Fig 8-16 Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristic


When the set frequency decrease from leveling frequency to zero, the deceleration characteristic is set by 07-23 to
07-25.When 07-23=0, the inverter ramps to deceleration as shown in Fig 8-17. When 07-23=1, the inverter decelerate in
S-curve as shown in Fig 8-18.
1 1 ( ( (* @
( 1 ,
6' (7

-. . 0

-.: /0

Fig 8-17 Deceleration Characteristic at Leveling (Ramp to Decelerate)

Fig 8-18 Deceleration Characteristic at Leveling (Decelerate In S-Curve)


The acceleration/dceleration characteristic of inspection operation is set by 01-13, 01-14. Please refer to 8.2 for
details.
8.5. Closed-loop vector control
8.5.1. Related Parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control
10-11 0A0BH ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 0.1 600.0 0x0112 8.5
(P) 1
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control
10-12 0A0CH ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.001 10.000 0x0312 8.5
(I) 1

8-14
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control
10-13 0A0DH ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 0.1 600.0 0x0112 8.5
(P) 2
ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control
10-14 0A0EH ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.001 10.000 0x0312 8.5
(I) 2
ASR Switch
10-15 0A0FH Hz 0.20 0.00 399.98 ASR switch frequency 1 0x1612 8.5
Freq1
ASR Switch
10-16 0A10H Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 ASR switch frequency 2 0x1612 8.5
Freq2
SPD CMD
10-17 0A11H sec 0.000 0.000 1.000 Low Pass Filter time of ASR output 0x0312 8.5
Filter
10-18 0A12H System Interia kgm2 6.00 0.01 100.00 Sets the system inertia. 0x0210 8.5.5
Acc Feedforward gain of acceleration
10-19 0A13H % 100 0 200 0x0012 8.5.5
Feedforword P reference.
Sets the filter time of torque observer.
T Observer
10-20 0A14H sec 0.000 0.000 0.100 (When value is lower than 0.002, the 0x0312
Filter
Observer will stop observing)
Sets the ASR control parameters
selection mode.
0: Kp and Ki are generated as
following shown.
1: Kp = 10-11, Ki = 10-12;
2: Kp = 10-13, Ki = 10-14.
5

- . 0

- . 0 6' (7
10-22 0A16H ASR KpKi Sel 0 0 2 ( 0x2012 8.5
- . /0 - . 40

- . 80

- . 0 6' (7
(

- . /0 - . 40

ASR P
10-24 0A18H % 0.0 0.0 600.0 Start ASR parameter Kp 0x0112
Gain@STA
ASR I
10-25 0A19H sec 0.030 0.001 10.000 Start ASR parameter Ki 0x0312
Gain@STA

8.5.2. Structure of Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)


In closed-loop vector control the automatic speed regulator (ASR) adjusts the torque reference in order to eliminate
the deviation between the speed reference and the measured motor speed. The ASR settings determine the motor speed
accuracy and stability. Fig 8-19 shows the speed loop structure. Fig 8-20 shows the ASR structure.

Fig 8-19 Speed Loop Structure

8-15
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-20 ASR Structure


8.5.3. ASR Gain and Integral Time Adjustments

Fig 8-21 Relation of ASR Step Response and ASR Gain and Integral Time
The relation of responsiveness of the ASR and the ASR gain and integral time is shown in Fig 8-21.
The responsiveness of the ASR is increased when the gain setting is increased but oscillations can occur when this
setting is too high.
Shortening the integral time increases the responsiveness of the ASR and the speed accuracy when the load
changes suddenly. Oscillations and overshooting can occur if the setting of this value is too low.
The steps of adjustment are as following.
1) Set ASR integral time to 0.
2) Set ASR gain as high as possible, escaping vibrations occur.
3) Adjust ASR integral time until the responsiveness and the overshooting of ASR meet the requirement.
4) Fig 8-22 shows the responsiveness characteristic when the ASR gain and integral time is adjusted to proper value.

Fig 8-22 Step Response of Speed Loop


If the ASR gain and integral time are not properly adjusted, over-voltage fault may occur when the motor rapidly
accelerates to high speed (without brake unit), caused by the energy regenerated when the motor returns from
overshooting. Increase integral time to lower overshooting.
8.5.4. Switch ASR gain and integral time
Since the feedback delay increases with the speed decrease, different responsiveness will be got under the same
ASR gain and integral time setting. The switching frequency is imported to make responsiveness in consistency
generally.The ASR gain and integral time will separately change to 10-11 and 10-12 when the set frequency is under
the switching frequency 1 (10-15). And they will separately change to 10-13 and 10-14 when the frequency is higher
than the switching frequency 2 (10-16). And the ramp to increase from 10-11/ 10-12 to 10-13/ 10-14 between switching
frequency 1 and switching frequency 2.

8-16
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-23 Switch ASR Gain and Integral Time


When 10-16 is smaller than 10-15, 10-15 will change to 0 automatically. 10-13 should be larger than 10-11 and
10-14 should be larger than 10-12. The steps are as following.
1) Select proper switching frequency 10-15 and 10-16.
2) Adjust ASR gain and integral at high speed(10-13 and 10-14), for no vibration and fast responsiveness
3) Adjust ASR gain and integral at low speed(10-11 and 10-12), for no vibration and fast responsiveness

8.5.5. Feedforward control


Feedforward control can be used to improve the performance of system. Fig 8-24 shows the control diagram.
Coefficient KFW is caculated from 10-18 and 10-19.

Feedforward control
KFW

Spd_ref + TL
Tem _
Spd_cmd Acc./ + + 1 1
Dec. _ KP KI
T s +1 +
+ Js
Spd_fdb

1
τs Conventional PI
Controller

Fig 8-24 Control Diagram of Feedforward Control

Without feedforward
control

Speed feedback

Speed reference

With feedforward
control
Speed feedback

Speed reference

Fig 8-25 Comparison of System Performance with and W/O Feedforward Control

8-17
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.6. Battery Operation


Inverter works in battery operation mode when power supply fails and inverter is in STOP status and Battery
operation enable signal from multi-function terminal is input. In this mode, Inverter runs at the frequency specified in
07-38 instead of multi-step frequency reference. The operation sequence charectar is the same as that in multi-step
speed reference model. Please refer to 8.1 for details.
8.6.1. Related parameters
Paramete
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
07-38 0726H Speed @Battery Op Hz 5.00 0 399.98 Speed reference in Battery operation mode 0x1612 8.6

8-18
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.7. Magnetic Pole Position Detection


8.7.1. Related parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Theta of Z-pulse position.This
Z-pulse
05-16 0510H deg 360.0 0 360.0 parameter is automaticclly set.It’ s 0x0100 8.7
MagPoleTheta
read only.
Sets this parameter to reset theta of
z-pulse position. User need to reset
the theta under listed condition
following.
Reset 1 A/B wire sequence of encode is
05-17 0511H 0 0 1 0x6010 8.7
Z-MagPoleTheta changed;
2. encoder changed;
3: Motor changed;
4: Phase sequence on the ouput
side is changed.
Sets the ouput voltage during
05-18 0512H MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 0 263.0 0x0113 8.7
magnetic pole theta detecting.
Sets the interval time during
magnetic pole theta detecting.
Detecting would fail if output
05-19 0513H MagPolDetect Time Sec 0.001 0.001 0.010 current is low although 05-18 is set 0x0312 8.7
the maximum value, In this
condition, user could change this
parameter to sovle this problem.

8.7.2. Magnetic Pole Position Detection


Magnetic Pole Position Detection is used for PM motors with incremental encoder. It measures the current
magnectic pole theta.
Related motor parameters shown in Tab 6-1 and 05-18 and 05-19 should be correctly set before magnetic pole
detection. When magnetic pole detection finished, the current magnectic pole theta and the Maximum Id will be
recorded in 2447H and 2448H respectively. Magnetic pole will be performed in following cases:
1) 05-00 set to 1. RUN command input.
The inverter automatically stops after magnetic pole detection finished.
2) Initial run after parameters reset or power supplied.
3) 05-17 set to 1.
After Magnetic Pole Position Detection is completed, the theta of Z-pulse position 05-16 (The theta between the
encoder zero position and the rotor magnet orientation) can also be measured when PG Z-pulse detected.
The theta of Z-pulse position 05-16 should be obtained in following cases as described in 6.2.4:
An inverter is setup the first time.
When the motor rotation direction has been changed.
When the encoder rotation direction has been changed.
When the encoder has been replaced.
8.8. Multi-function input
8.8.1. Related parameters
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Multi-function input terminal 1
function selection
0: No function;
1: Multi-step speed reference 1;
2: Multi-step speed reference 2;
3: Multi-step speed reference 3;
02-01 0201H MultiFunction In 1 1 0 11 0x2010 8.8
4: Multi-step speed reference 4;
5: External fault (EF) input;
6: Inspection run;
7: Fault/Warn external reset;
8: Battery operation;
9: Weighing signal 1

8-19
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
10: Weighing signal 2
11: Weighing signal 3
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 2
02-02 0202H 2 0 11 0x2010 8.8
2 function selection
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 3
02-03 0203H 3 0 11 0x2010 8.8
3 function selection
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 4
02-04 0204H 4 0 11 0x2010 8.8
4 function selection
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 5
02-05 0205H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
5 function selection
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 6
02-06 0206H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
6 function selection
Multi-Function In Multi-function input terminal 7
02-07 0207H 0 0 11 0x2010 8.8
7 function selection
Sets the multi-function input
terminal action mode in 16-bit.
When the related bit is set 1, the
terminal treats the same input
level as the status on the
contrary of that when the bit is
set 0.
bit0: FWD;
02-27 021BH Multi-Input ACT 0 0 65535 bit1: REV; 0x0052 8.8
bit2: MI1;
bit3: MI2;
bit4: MI3;
bit5: MI4;
bit6: MI5;
bit7: MI6;
bit8: MI7;

Sets the frequency reference


when multi-step speed reference
01-23 0117H Multi-Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0001.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-24 0118H Multi-Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0010.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-25 0119H Multi-Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0011.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-26 011AH Multi-Speed 4 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0100.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-27 011BH Multi-Speed 5 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0101.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-28 011CH Multi-Speed 6 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0110.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-29 011DH Multi-Speed 7 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0111.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-30 011EH Multi-Speed 8 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1000.
01-31 011FH Multi-Speed 9 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 Sets the frequency reference 0x1612 8.8

8-20
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
when multi-step speed reference
command from multi-function
input is 1001.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-32 0120H Multi-Speed 10 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1010.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-33 0121H Multi-Speed 11 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1011.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-34 0122H Multi-Speed 12 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1100.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-35 0123H Multi-Speed 13 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1101.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-36 0124H Multi-Speed 14 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1110.
Sets the frequency reference
when multi-step speed reference
01-37 0125H Multi-Speed 15 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1111.

8.8.2. Multi-step speed reference function


The multi-function terminal is used as multi-step speed reference input terminal when the corresponding
parameters is set to 1-4. Example: Parameters 02-01 to 02-04 are set as following table shows.

Terminal Parameter Value


MI1 02-01 1
MI2 02-02 2
MI3 02-03 3
MI4 02-04 4

The speed reference step code is obtained according to the status of terminal MI1 to MI4 (i.e., the code is 0x1010
when MI4 and MI 2 are ON and MI3 and MI1 are OFF). The final speed reference is obtainded according to the speed
reference step code (i.e., the speed reference is the value set in 01-32).

Fig 8-26 Relation of Step Codes And Speed References


The relation between speed reference and terminal status is shown as following.

8-21
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

. .
( .
. ;
.
. A
.
. :
. 8
. 4
. /
. /
. 4
. 8
. :
.
@

9 ' *. . # ,

9 ' *. . # ,

9 ' *. . # ,

98 ' *. .8 # 8,

Fig 8-27 Relation of Speed References and the Status af Multi-Function Terminal
8.8.3. Inspection Run Function
For example, when 07-18 is set to 2 and 02-01 is set to 1 and 02-02 is set to 2, the inspection run speed reference is
determined according to the status of MI1 and MI2.

Terminal Parameter Value


MI1 02-01 1
MI2 02-02 2

The relation between inspection run speed reference and the status of MI1 and MI2 is shown as following.
(
6' (7
(

.:
.: .
.: ;

9 ' *. . $ 4,

9 ' *. . $ 4,

Fig 8-28 Relation of Inspection Speed Reference and the Status of Multi-Function Terminal

8.9. Multi-function Output


8.9.1. Related Parameters

8-22
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Multi-function output terminal RA/
RB/ RC function selection.
1: During run indicate;
2: Frequency agreement indicate;
3: Frequency agreement indicate 2;
4: Fault indicate;
02-11 020BH Multi-Func.Out 1 1 0 9 5: Control signal of Brake; 0x2012 8.9
6: Control signal of contactor on the
output side;
7: Warn indicate;
8: Ouput current under level indicate;
9: Control signal of contactor on the
input side.
Multi-function output terminal
02-12 020CH Multi-Func.Out 2 4 0 9 0x2012 8.9
MRA1/ MRC1 function selection.
Multi-function output terminal MO1
02-13 020DH Multi-Func.Out 3 2 0 9 0x2012 8.9
function selection.
Multi-function output terminal MO2
02-14 020EH Multi-Func.Out 4 3 0 9 0x2012 8.9
function selection.
Multi-function output terminal MO1
02-15 020FH Multi-Func.Out 5 0 0 9 0x2012 8.9
function selection.
Multi-function output terminal MO2
02-16 0210H Multi-Func.Out 6 0 0 9 0x2012 8.9
function selection.
Sets the multi-function output
terminal action mode in
16-bit.Terminals output level when
the related bit is set 1 on the contrary
02-17 0211H Multi-Output ACT 0 0 65535 of that when the bit is set 0. 0x0052 8.9
bit0: RA/ RB/ RC;
bit1: MRA/ MRC;
bit2: MO1;
bit3: MO2;
Sets the desired frequency agreement
02-19 0213H DESIRE-FREQ1 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
detection level 1.
DESIRE-FREQ1 Sets the frequency agreement
02-20 0214H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND detection band for level 1.
Sets the desired frequency agreement
02-21 0215H DESIRE-FREQ2 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
detection level 2.
DESIRE-FREQ2 Sets the frequency agreement
02-22 0216H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND detection band for level 2.
Sets the output current detect level.
If a multi-function output terminal is
programmed for this function (8 is
set in the according parameter), the
output will be switched ON when the
feedback current is lower than the
value set in 02-25. The output level
02-25 0219H Current Detect % 2 0 250 0x0012 8.9
depends on 02-27 (low level for ON
when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise
high level).
'1 ' ( ' '
&3

&' ' (' ) ( *+,


&$$
-. /0 -. /02 +

8.9.2. During Run Indicate


If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (1 is set in the according parameter), the output
will be switched ON when the inverter is in RUNNING status. The output level depends on 02-27 (low level for ON
when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level).
8.9.3. Frequency agreement indicate
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (2 or 3 is set in the according parameter), the
output will be switched ON when frequency reference reaches desired value(02-19 or 02-21).The output level depends
on 02-27 (low level for ON when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level).

8-23
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-29 Frequency Agreement Indicate


8.9.4. Fault indicate
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (4 is set in the according parameter), the output
will be switched ON when fault accors and the inverter is in STOP status. The output level depends on 02-27 (low level
for ON when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level). Please refer to Troubleshooting for details of fault information.
8.9.5. Control signal of Brake
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (5 is set in the according parameter), the
terminal can output brake control signal.The output level depends on 02-27(low level for ON when 02-27 is set to 1,
otherwise high level).Please refer to section 6.8.2 and 6.8.3 for details.
8.9.6. Control signal of contactor on the output side;
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (6 is set in the according parameter), the
terminal can output control signal for inverter output contactor. The output level depends on 02-27(low level for ON
when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level).Please refer to section 6.8.2 and 6.8.3 for details.
8.9.7. Warn indicate
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (7 is set in the according parameter), the
terminal can output control signal for inverter output contactor. The output level depends on 02-27(low level for ON
when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level).Please refer to chapter 8 for details of warn information.
8.9.8. Ouput current under level indicate
If a multi-function output terminal is programmed for this function (8 is set in the according parameter), the output
will be switched ON when the feedback current is lower than the value set in 02-25. The output level depends on 02-27
(low level for ON when 02-27 is set to 1, otherwise high level).

Fig 8-30 Output Current under Level Indicate


8.10. Analog Output/Input
8.10.1. Related parameters

8-24
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AVI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0-
10V(varies according to 03-09 )
for 0-maximum output
8.3
03-00 0300H AVI Input setting 1 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V(varies according to 03-09 )
for 0~maximim ouput torque
(04-02);
4: Reserved.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal ACI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~ 10V/
0 ~ 20mA(varies according to
03-10 ) for 0 ~ maximum output
8.3
03-01 0301H ACI Input setting 0 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V / 0 ~ 20mA(varies
according to 03-10) for
0~maximim ouput torque;
4: Reserved.
Sets the multi-function analog
input function for terminal AUI.
0: No function;
1: Frequency reference, 0 ~ 10V/
0 ~ -10V(varies according to
03-11 ) for 0 ~ maximum output
8.3
03-02 0302H AUI Input setting 0 0 4 frequency(01-01); 0x2012
8.10
2: Reserved;
3: starting torque compensation, 0
~ 10V / 0 ~ -10V(varies according
to 03-11) for 0~maximim ouput
torque;
4: Reserved.
Sets the input bias of AVI
terminal. When bias level is input,
03-03 0303H AVI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0x0192 8.10
the according function command
is zero. (0 ~ 10V for 0~ 100%)
Sets the input bias of ACI
terminal. When bias level is input,
03-04 0304H ACI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 0x0192 8.10
the according function command
is zero. (0 ~ 20mA for 0~ 100%)
Sets the input bias of AUI
terminal. When bias level is input,
03-05 0305H AUI input Bias % 0.0 -100.0 100.0 the according function command 0x0192 8.10
is zero. (-10 ~ 10V for -100~
100%)
Selects the bais mode of AVI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
AVI input 1: Lower than bias=bias
03-06 0306H 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
Polarity 2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center

8-25
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Selects the bais mode of ACI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
ACI input 1: Lower than bias=bias
03-07 0307H 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
Polarity 2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center
Selects the bais mode of AUI
terminal.
0: Zero bias
AUI input 1: Lower than bias=bias
03-08 0308H 0 0 4 0x2010 8.10
Polarity 2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias
voltage while serving as thecenter
4: Serve bias as the center
Sets the input gain of AVI
03-09 0309H AVI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0192 8.10
terminal.
Sets the input gain of ACI
03-10 030AH ACI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0192 8.10
terminal.
Sets the input gain of AUI
03-11 030BH AUI input Gain % 100.0 -500.0 500.0 0x0192 8.10
terminal.
Selects the function of ACI
ACII/ACIU terminal.
03-12 030CH 0 0 1 0x2012 8.10
Selection 0: ACII;
1: ACIU;
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-13 030DH AVI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the AVI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-14 030EH ACI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the ACI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Sets delay filter time constant in
03-15 030FH AUI Input LPF sec 0.01 0.00 2.00 seconds for the AUI analog input. 0x0212 8.10
Effective for noise control .
Select the function of the analog
output terminal AFM.
0: Frequency command in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
1: Frequency output in Hz, 100%
for 400Hz;
2: Frequency feedback in Hz,
100% for 400Hz;
3: Current output, 100% for 2.5
times of inverter rated current;
4: D-axis voltage reference, 100%
03-18 0312H AFM Setting 0 0 13 for 577.4V; 0x0012
5: Q-axis voltage reference, 100%
for 577.4V;
6: Half DCBus voltage, 100% for
577.4V;
7: AVI;
8: ACI;
9: AUI;
10: Iq reference;
11: Iq feedback;
12: Id reference;
13: Id feedback;
03-19 0313H AFM Gain % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 Sets the output gain of AFM 0x0112

8-26
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the AFM output mode.
0: Output the absolute voltage;
1: Output zero voltage if
03-20 0314H AFM In Minus 0 0 2 0x2012
according value is in minus
2: Output 0 ~ 10V for -100% ~
100%.

AFMU/AFMI Analog output type select  0 


03-21 0315H 0 0 1 0x2012 0x3FFF
select 0~10V  1  0~20mA 

Pulse output select  0  frequency


command Hz % 400Hz for 100% 
1  Output frequency Hz % 400Hz
for 100%  2  motor speed Hz %
400Hz for 100%  3  output
current % Converter 2.5 times of
Pulse Output rated current of 100  4  d axis
03-22 0316H 0 0 13 0x0012
Function voltage command % With 577.4V
100%  5  q axis votage % With
577.4V 100%  6  0.5DCBus
voltage % With 577.4V 100%  7 
AVI  8  ACI  9  AUI  10  Iq
command  11  Iq feedback  12 
Id command  13  Id feedback 

Pulse Output Pulse output gain % 0~setting


03-23 0317H % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 0x0112
Gain valaue according to 0~20kHz

Pulse output reverse set  0 


Pulse Output Absolute values of output  1 
03-24 0318H 0 0 2 0x2012
Reverse Set reverse output  2  0~20kHz
according to -100%~100% 

Pulse input gain % 0~20kHz


03-25 0319H Pulse Input Gain % 100.0 0.0 1000.0 0x0112
acorrding to 0~[01-01]

Sets the minimum input limitation


06-42 062AH AVI Input Min % 0 0 100 0x0012 8.10
of AVI. (0 ~ 10V for 0 ~ 100.0%)

Sets the maximum input


06-43 062BH AVI Input Max % 100 0 100 limitation of AVI. (0 ~ 10V for 0 0x0012 8.10
~ 100.0%)

Sets the minimum input limitation


06-44 062CH ACI Input Min % 20 0 100 of ACI. (0 ~ 20mA for 0 ~ 0x0012 8.10
100.0%)

Sets the maximum input


06-45 062DH ACI Input Max % 100 0 100 limitation of ACI. (0 ~ 20mA for 0x0012 8.10
0 ~ 100.0%)

Sets the minimum input limitation


AUI Input Min
06-46 062EH % -100 -100 100 of AUI. (-10 ~ 10V for -100.0 ~ 0x0092 8.10
100.0%)

8-27
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.

Sets the maximum input


06-47 062FH AUI Input Max % 100 -100 100 limitation of AUI. (-10 ~ 10V for 0x0092 8.10
-100.0 ~ 100.0%)

Sets the operation for when the


AVI error occurs. (The AVI
input exceed the range)
1: A warn is given and continue
06-48 0630H AVI Error Action 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012 8.10
2: A fault is given and
Deceleration to stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to
stop.
Sets the operation for when the
ACI error occurs. (The ACI
input exceed the range)
1: A warn is given and continue
06-49 0631H ACI Error Action 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012 8.10
2: A fault is given and
Deceleration to stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to
stop.
Sets the operation for when the
AUI errort occurs. (The AUI
input exceed the range)
1: A warn is given and continue
06-50 0632H AUI Error Action 0 0 2 operation; 0x2012 8.10
2: A fault is given and
Deceleration to stop;
3: A fault is given and coast to
stop.

8.10.2. Analog input diagram

Fig 8-31 Input Diagram of AVI

Fig 8-32 Input Diagram of ACI

8-28
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Fig 8-33 Input Diagram of AUI


8.10.3. Analog input bias
For AVI input, the bias level is set by 03-03, the bias mode is selected by 03-06.
For ACI input, the bias level is set by 03-04, the bias mode is selected by 03-07.
For AUI input, the bias level is set by 03-05, the bias mode is selected by 03-08.
The difference of the 4 kinds of bias mode is shown in Fig 6-36.Take AVI input for example.

Fig 8-34 03-06=1

Fig 8-35 03-06=2

Fig 8-36 03-06=3


' ' '

) @ 8 . .

@ @

Fig 8-37 03-06=4

8-29
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

8.10.4. Analog Output


' '
." 1 1

'
' '
(
-. ;0 ." .+ ..+
' '
( ' '
)7 -. A0 -. ;0
' ' @ '

' ' ' ' ' '


." 1 1 ." 1 1 ." 1 1

' ' ' ' ' '


( ( (

..+ ." ..+ ..+ ." ..+ ..+ ." ..+

1
' '

Fig 8-38 Output Diagram of Analog Output


8.10.5. pulse output
pulse output progress refer to the below pic:

Pic 8-1 pulse output process

8.11. S-curve running simulation caculating


In elevator application, some distance informations are need for operation control. These nessary distance can be

8-30
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

caculated out using the S-curve running simulation caculating function based on the parameters related such as S-curve,
multi-step speed control sequence, etc. Steps of S-curve running simulation caculating are listed following.
1) Set frequency reference.
2) Set 05-00 to 5 for PM motor or set 05-30 to3 for IM motor.
3) Input Run command.
4) Wait until s-curve running simulation caculating finished.
5) Communication address 2441H to 2446H will be updated.
The elevator can access communication address 2441H to 2446H for distance information.
8.12. Address mapping
User need only to set and monitor parts of the parameters not listed in sequence. The RAM mapping function
(refer to 7.3.13) and User Define mapping function (Refer to 7.3.14) is supported for convenience.
8.12.1. RAM mapping
RAM from address 2410H to address 2448H can be mapped to 13 - RAM Map Parameter. For example:
1) Set 13-00 to 1.
2) 13-01 becomes settable. Any value between 9232(2410H) and 9288(2448H) can be set. Set 13-01 to 9232.
3) Set 13-00 to 0.
4) Access 13-01 again. The value displayed is not the value of 13-01 self but the value in the mapped address
9232(2410H).
8.12.2. User define mapping
Any parameters of 00 - System Parameter to 12 - Fault Record can be mapped to 14 - User Define Parameter. For
example, if user need to access 01-13 and 07-17 frequently, user defined mapping function can make this convenient.
1) Set 14-00 to 1.
2) 14-01 and 14-02 become settable. Set 14-01 to 010DH. Set 14-02 to 0711H.
3) Set 14-00 to 0.
4) User can access 14-01 instead of 01-13, and access 14-02 instead of 07-17.

8-31
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

9. Communication
9.1. Data Format
EFC B1 can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using RTU mode with “8,N,2” protocol.

9.2. Communication Protocol


9.2.1. Communication Data Frame:
Communication Data Frame is shown in Tab 9-1.
Tab 9-1 Communication Data Frame
Item Content
START A silent interval of more than silent time set in 09-05 and 09-10
Address Communication address: 8-bit address
Function Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
Contents of data:
…….
n & 8-bit data, n<=16
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low CRC check sum:
CRC CHK High 16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
END A silent interval of more than silent time set in 09-05 and 09-10
9.2.2. Address (Communication Address):
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
The address can be set up to 254(FFH).
9.2.3. Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The available function codes and examples for EFC B1 are described as follows:
1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, drive address is 01H.
A. Command message:
Address 01H
Function 03H
21H
Starting data address
02H
Number of data 00H
(count by world) 02H
CRC CHK Low 6FH
CRC CHK High F7H
B. Response message:
Address 01H
Function 03H
Number of data
04H
(count by byte)
Content of data 17H
address 2102H 70H
Content of data 00H
address 2103H 00H
CRC CHK Low FEH
CRC CHK High 5CH

2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.

9-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. drive address is 01H.


A. Command message:
Address 01H
Function 06H
01H
Data address
00H
17H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H
B. Response message:
Address 01H
Function 06H
01H
Data address
00H
17H
Data content
70H
CRC CHK Low 86H
CRC CHK High 22H
3) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: [24-00]=1388H, [24-01]=0FA0H. AC drive address is 01H.
A. Command message:
Address 01H
Function 10H
24H
Starting data address
00H
Number of data 00H
(count by world) 02H
Number of data
04
(count by byte)
13H
The first data content
88H
0FH
The second data content
A0H
CRC Check Low D9H
CRC Check High 88H

B. Response message:
Address 01H
Function 10H
24H
Starting data address
00H
Number of data 00H
(count by world) 02H
CRC Check Low 4BH
CRC Check High 38H

9.2.4. CRC Check Sum in RTU Mode


CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR to the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the 16-bit CRC
register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling, then
repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero filling,
Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8-bit byte will
have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this until all bytes have
been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value. When transmitting the CRC value in the
message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted
first.

9-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two arguments:
unsigned char* data // a pointer to the message buffer
unsigned char length // the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length)
{
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0Xffff;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0Xa001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
9.3. Address List
Content Address Function
AC drive GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number, for example, the address of
GGnnH
Parameters 04-01 is 0401H.
2400H  00XX 
Elevator Absolute Position
2401H  XXXX 
bit0 FWD(1 for ON signal issued)
bit1 REV(1 for ON signal issued)
bit2 XI1(1 for ON signal issued)
bit3 XI2(1 for ON signal issued)
bit4 XI3(1 for ON signal issued)
From Elevator to bit5 XI4(1 for ON signal issued)
Inverter 2402H bit6 XI5(1 for ON signal issued)
bit7 XI6(1 for ON signal issued)
bit8 XI7(1 for ON signal issued)
bit9 XI8(1 for ON signal issued)
bit10 XI9(1 for ON signal issued)
bit11 Reserved (1 for ON signal issued)
bit12~bit15 0000, Reserved
2403H Weighing (%)
From Inverter to 2410H Speed Reference
Elevator 2411H Speed Feedback
2412H RMS value of output current
2413H Speed Unit(Refer to description of parameter 01-00)
2414H Weighing (%)
2415H Error-Warn Code, Error code in the higher byte/ Warn code in the lower byte
2416H Position High Word(Pulse)
2417H Position LowWord(Pulse)
bit0 Run/Stop
bit1 Rev/Fwd
bit2 A0*
bit3 A1*
bit4 A2*
bit5 Brake ON
bit6 MC ON
2418H Run Status
bit7 In Inspection
bit8 Fault
bit9 Warn
bit10 Frequency Agreement 1
bit11 Frequency Agreement 2
bit12 Current under level
bit13~bit15 000, Reserved
241EH Version:Year/Month
241FH Version:Day/Series Number

9-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Content Address Function


2420H Instant Value of U Phase Current(0.01A)
2421H Instant Value of W Phase Current(0.01A)
2422H Temperature 1 (  )
2423H Temperature 2 (  )
2424H AD Value of AVI Channel (%)
2425H AD Value of ACI Channel (%)
2426H AD Value of AUI Channel (%)
2427H DCBus Voltage (0.1V)
2428H Status of digital input terminal (1 for effective)
2429H Electrical Theta (PU Value)
242AH Mechanical Theta(PU Value)
242BH Iq Feedback (0.01A)
242CH Id Feedback (0.01A)
242DH Power Out (0.01kW)
242EH Output Stator Frequency(0.01Hz)
242FH Objective Speed Reference(0.01Hz)
2430H Iq Reference (0.01A)
2431H Id Reference (0.01A)
2432H 0, Reserved
2433H Uq Reference (0.1V)
2434H Ud Reference (0.1V)
2435H RMS Value of Uout (0.1V)
2436H Pulse output (%)
2437H Status of digital output terminal (1 for effective)
2438H DSP Port A Register PAPRL
2439H DSP Port B Register PBPRH
243AH Reserved
243BH DSP Port D Register PDPRL
243CH DSP Port E Register PEPRH
243DH DSP Port E Register PEPRL
243EH Inverter Accumulative Run Time(minute)
243FH Inverter Accumulative Run Time(day)
2440H Scurve 2nd Inflexion
2441H Leveling Deceleration Distance High Part
2442H Leveling Deceleration Distance Low Part
2443H S-curve Deceleration Distance High Part
2444H S-curve Deceleration Distance Low Part
2445H S-curve Minimum Distance High Part
2446H S-curve Minimum Distance Low Part
2447H Initial Magnetic Pole theta
2448H Maximum Id in Magnetic Pol Detection
* Explanation of A2A1A0

Value of A2A1A0 Explanation


000 At Stop
001 At Zero-speed Running
010 At DWELL
011 At Acceleration
100 At High-speed Running
101 At Deceleration
110 At Leveling
111 At leveling Deceleration
9.4. Exception Response
If the inverter does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC motor drive has no
response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
If the inverter receives the messages without a communication error, but it cannot handle them, an exception
response will be returned to the master device. In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original
command code is set to 1, and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example '

9-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Address 01H
Function 86H
Exception code 02H
CRC CHK Low C3H
CRC CHK High A1H
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception Code Explanation
2 Illegal data address: The data address received in the command message is not available for the inverter.
3 Illegal data value: The data value received in the command message is not available for the invertere.

9-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

10. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the inverter faults, alarms, related displays, and guidance for troubleshooting.
10.1. Troubleshooting Precautions

Turn the power OFF and wait for more than five minutes, before starting inspection. Further, check that the Digital
Operator is unlit, and check the DC link bus voltage between the P2(P) and N terminals to be lower than 25 VDC.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
Take off the watch, rings and other metallic matter before starting work.
Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual, the motor may
rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
In the tuning process of the inverter, no motor torque control for braking of the machinery takes effect.Tune the
inverter for the motor after disconnecting it from the machinery, or after mechanically brakes the machinery. Anyway,
do it after suppressing any dangerous factors.
An accident or injuries could occur.

10.2. Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting


Follow the procedure below to solve problems.
1) First, check that the inverter is correctly wired.
2) Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the Digital Operator.
3) No alarm code appears on the Digital Operator
A. Abnormal motor operation
The motor does not rotate.
The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase.
If the speed variation and current vibration (such as hunting) occur at the constant speed.
High frequency acoustic noise from motor.
B. Problems with inverter settings
Nothing appears on the Digital Operator
Data of function codes cannot be changed
4) If an Alarm Code Appears on the Digital Operator
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your representative.
10.3. If No Alarm Code Appears on the Digital Operator
10.3.1. Motor is running abnormally
1) The motor does not rotate
Cause Possible Solutions
1) Input a run command.
Neither forward run command nor reverse run command were
2) Set either FWD or REV to off if both run commands are
inputted,or both run commands were inputted simultaneously,
being inputted.
either forward or reverse run command was always on from
3) Set either FWD or REV to off after motor stopped.
power on or stopped @00-12 set to 1(RUN commond input from
4) Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit
multi-function input terminal )
terminals FWD and REV correctly
Control method 00-04=0 Set 00-04 correctly according to the motor.
When 00-12=0 % PU is not putted Setting PU,refer to Digital Operator
The speed reference source setting 00-11 is incorrect. Set 00-11 to the correct source of the speed reference.
Speed reference is too low. Increase the speed reference

2) The motor rotates, but the speed does not increase.


Cause Possible Solutions
The maximum speed was set to too low a value. Readjust the parameter 01-01
The reference speed (pre-ramp) command was set to too low a
Increase the reference speed
value.
The acceleration time was too long Change the acceleration/Deceleration time to match the load.

10-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Cause Possible Solutions


1) Lighten the load or change the inverter for an upper size.
Overload 2) Check if mechanical brake is working.
3) Release the mechanical brake.
The output speed did not increase due to the current limiting
Set 06-00 correctly
operation.

3) the speed variation and current vibration


Cause Possible Solutions
1) Increase (03-13~03-15)
2) Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires
as far as possible.
The reference speed (analog) fluctuated. 3) Use shielded or twisted wires for the control signal.
4) Connect a capacitor to the output terminals of the speed
command source or pass the signal wire through a ferrite
core.
1) Ground the shielded sheath at the motor side.
Signal cable from the pulse encoder picks noises up. 2) Connect it to the inverter’ s SGND terminal.
3) Raise 10-17
The machinery having low stiffness in a load causes hunting, or

1) Decrease 10-11 10-13 (ASR P constant )


the output current is oscillatory due to irregular motor

parameters. 2) Increase 10-12 10-14 (ASR I constant)

4) High frequency acoustic noise from the motor


Cause Possible Solutions
The carrier frequency is too low Increase the carrier frequency in parameter 00-10
Disconnect the motor and run it without the inverter, and
Resonance with the load determine where the resonance comes from. Upon locating the
cause, improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance.

10.3.2. Problems with inverter settings


1) Nothing appears on the multi-function Digital Operator.
Cause Possible Solutions
1) Check the power supply and measure the input voltage
phase R to phase S.
2) Turn on the molded case circuit breaker, earth leakage
No power supplied to the inverter circuit breaker (with overcurrent protection) or magnetic
contactor on the primary circuit.
3) Check for voltage drop, phase loss, weak connections, or
weak contacts, and fix them if necessary.
1) Check if the short bar has been removed between terminals
P1and P2 or if there is poor contact between the short bar
and the terminals.
The power for the control circuit did not reach a high enough
2) Connect the short bar or DC reactor between terminals
level.
P1and P2 or retighten the screws.
3) Check the voltage between P2(P) and N, if no, the inverter
is damaged, contact your representative.
1) Check whether the Digital Operator is properly connected
to the inverter.
2) Remove the Digital Operator, put it back, and see whether
The Digital Operator was not properly connected to the inverter.
the problem persists.
3) Replace the Digital Operator with another one and check
whether the problem persists.

2) Cannot Change Parameter Settings


Cause Possible Solutions
1) Check if the inverter is running and then confirm whether
An attempt was made to change function code data that cannot the parameter can be changed when the motor is running
be changed when the inverter is running. by referring to the function code tables.
2) Stop the motor then change the parameter.
1) If the password entered to 00-08 does not match the
password saved to 00-09, then drive settings cannot be
The wrong password was entered.
changed.
2) Reset the password.
The access level is set to restrict access to parameter settings. Set the access level 00-03 to allow parameters to be edited

10-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

10.4. If an Alarm Code Appears on the Digital Operator


10.4.1. Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Tab 10-1 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the
inverter.
Tab 10-1 Types of Alarms and Faults

Display Ab. Code Name Level[1] Parameter

MagDetect Err MD 40 PM Rotor Position Estimation Error B1 N

OC H-3.0 S-2.44 OC 41 Overcurrent A N

Over Voltage OV 43 Overvoltage B1 N


C1 06-17=2
IGBT.Temp OH1 44 Heatsink Overheat (Fault)
C2 06-17=1

Invert OL.Err OL 45 Inverter overload  Fault  C1 N

Motor OL.Err OL1 46 Motor overload(Fault) B1 N

External Fault EF 47 External Fault B1 N

ERC_GFF GFF 54 Ground Fault A N

C1 06-03=2

DCBUS Low Vol. LV 55 Undervoltage C2 06-03=1

D 06-03=0

EEPROM Fault1 CF1 56 EEPROM programmed. error A N

EEPROM Fault2 CF2 57 EEPROM read error A N

C1 06-05=2
Lack of Phase PHL 63 Input phase loss C2 06-05=1
D 06-05=0
B1 10-06=2
Over Speed OSPD 70 Over speed error B2 10-06=1
D 10-06=0
Parameter self
ATE 71 Autotuning unnormal B1 NO
calibration fault
NO PG card PGE0 72 NO PG card C2 NO
B1 06-19=2
Fan Fault FAN 74 Fan failure B2 06-19=1
D 06-19=0
PG Err 1 PGE1 75 PG error1 B1 N

PG Err 2 PGE2 76 PG error2 B1 N

PG Err 3 PGE3 77 PG error3 B1 N

B1 10-02=2
PG Z Loss PGZ 78 PG Z pulse error B2 10-02=1
D 10-02=0
PG Dev. PGD 79 Speed Deviation B1 10-09=2
BrakeU Short BF1 80 Brake unit short circuit A N

10-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Name Level[1] Parameter

BrakeU Broken BF2 81 Brake unit short circuit A N

IGBT OC OCC 82 IGBT overcurrent A N

Curr. 1 Err CD1 86 U phase current error A N

Curr. 2 Err CD2 87 V phase current error A N

Curr. 3 Err CD3 88 W phase current error A N

C1 06-48=2
AVI Fault AVIE 90 AVI error C2 06-48=1
D 06-48=0
C1 06-49=2
ACI Fault ACIE 91 ACI error C2 06-49=1
D 06-49=0
C1 06-50=2
AUI Fault AUIE 92 AUI error C2 06-50=1
D 06-50=0
C1 06-40=2
TH1 Err LH1 93 Temperature sensor Error C2 06-40=1
D 06-40=0
Invert OL.Warn OL 100 Inverter overload D N
Motor OL.Warn OL1 101 Motor overload D N
IGBT.Temp Warn OH1 103 Heatsink Overheat( alarm) D 06-17=0

Note 1 

A  The fault interrupts inverter output and the motor coasts to a stop. The digital operator displays text that indicates the
specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Fault output terminals will close. When the
cause of the fault is removed, turn off the inverter main power supply and reapply power after the digital operator display is
out.to reset the fault. The inverter will remain inoperable until that fault has been cleared

B1  The fault interrupts inverter output and the motor coasts to a stop. The digital operator displays text that indicates the
specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Fault output terminals will close. When the
cause of the fault is removed, using Fault Reset Digital Input or RST to reset the fault. The inverter will remain inoperable
until that fault has been cleared

B2  The motor is rampped to a stop when a fault is triggered. The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault
and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Fault output terminals will close when the output is off.
When the cause of the fault is removed, using Fault Reset Digital Input or RST to reset the fault. The inverter will remain
inoperable until that fault has been cleared

C1  The fault interrupts inverter output and the motor coasts to a stop. The digital operator displays text that indicates the
specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Fault output terminals will close. When the
cause of the fault is removed, the inverter can reset the fault auto. The inverter will remain inoperable until that fault has
been cleared

C2  The motor is rampped to a stop when a fault is triggered. The digital operator displays text that indicates the specific fault
and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Fault output terminals will close when the output is off.
When the cause of the fault is removed, the inverter can reset the fault auto. The inverter will remain inoperable until that

10-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

fault has been cleared

D  Alarms are protection functions that do not necessarily cause the inverter to stop. When an alarm has been triggered, the
ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display flashes. If a multi-function output is set for an
alarm, that output terminal will be triggered for certain alarms. Once the cause of an alarm is removed, the inverter will
return to the same status as before the alarm occurred.
10.4.2. Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
The detailed fault displays, causes, and possible solutions are shown in Tab 10-2.
Tab 10-2 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution
Parameters that control Initial
Repeat the setup process and set 05-01,
Pole Search are set incorrectly
05-18, 05-19 properly
(set up may be incomplete).
MagDetect Err MD 40 Initial Pole Search error 1) Check the output current.
2) Check for wiring errors and
The output cable is disconnected.
ensure the output cable is
connected properly.
1) Remove the wires connected to
the inverter output terminals (U,
V, and W) and measure the
The inverter output terminals interphase resistance of the
were short-circuited. wires. Check if the resistance is
too low.
2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
1) Remove the wires connected to
the inverter output terminals (U,
Ground faults occurred at the V, and W) and perform a Megger
inverter output terminals. test.
2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
1) Measure the current flowing into
the motor.
2) Replace the inverter with a larger
Overcurrent: capacity unit if the current value
The inverter momentary exceeds the rated current of the
OC H-3.0 S-2.44 OC 41 output current exceeded The load is too heavy. inverter.
specified overcurrent 3) Determine if there is sudden
level. fluctuation in the current level.
4) Reduce the load to avoid sudden
changes in the current level or
switch to a larger drive.
Magnetic parameter setting Magnetic parameter setting ( 05-18 (
inappropriate presumption 05-19 parameter big.
1) Increase
The acceleration/Deceleration Acceleration/Deceleration Time.
time was too short. 2) Change the inverter for an upper
size.
1) Review the possible solutions
provided for handling noise
interference.
Inverter fails to operate properly
2) Review the section on handling
due to noise interference.
noise interference and check the
control circuit lines, main circuit
lines, and ground wiring.

10-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution


1) Lengthen the Deceleration ramp.
2) Make sure the braking resistor
rating/external braking transistor
Deceleration ramp is too short and
rating fits the application.
regenerative energy is flowing
3) If an external braking transistor
from the motor into the inverter.
is used, make sure it is connected
properly and working as
expected.

Check the braking resistor is


Overvoltage: Braking load was too heavy. connected to terminals P 2 and DB
The DC bus voltage has correctly.
Over Voltage OV 43 exceeded the
overvoltage detection
The wrong overvoltage detection
level setting in 06-41. Set 06-41 correctly.
level is set to 06-41.
1) Review the possible solutions
provided for handling noise
interference.
Inverter fails to operate properly
2) Review the section on handling
due to noise interference.
noise interference and check the
control circuit lines, main circuit
lines, and ground wiring.
The power supply voltage was
Decrease the voltage to within that of
over the range of the inverter’ s
the specifications.
specifications.
1) Check the temperature
surrounding the inverter.
2) Improve the air circulation
within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too
3) Install a fan or air conditioner to
high.
cool the surrounding area.
4) Remove anything near the
inverter that might be producing
Heatsink overheat: excessive heat.
The temperature of the 1) Set 06-18 to 0,1,2,3;
Internal cooling fan is stopped.
IGBT.Temp OH1 44 heatsink exceeded the 2) Replace the cooling fan.
overheat pre-alarm level 1) Check if there is sufficient
set to 06-16. clearance around the inverter.
2) Increase the clearance.
Air vent is blocked
3) Check if the heat sink is not
clogged.
4) Clean the heat sink.
1) Measure the output current.
2) Lower the carrier frequency
Load is too heavy.
(00-10).
3) Reduce the load.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
1) Reduce the load when operating
at low speeds.
Overload occurred when
Inverter Overload: operating at low speeds. 2) Replace the inverter with a
Electronic thermal model that is one frame size
Invert OL.Err OL 45 function for inverter larger.
overload detection was
activated. 1) Lengthen the acceleration and
Accel/No.el ramp is too short.
Deceleration ramp.

Replace the inverter with a larger


Drive capacity is too small.
model.
Motor OL.Err OL1 46 Motor Overload Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
Electronic thermal 1) Check the motor-rated current.
function for motor The wrong motor rated current is 2) Enter the value written on the
overload detection was set to 05-01. motor nameplate to parameter
activated. 05-01

10-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution


1) Check the motor characteristics.
The characteristics of electronic
2) Correct the type of motor
thermal motor protection did not
protection that has been selected
match those of the motor
(06-14).
overload.
3) Install an external thermal relay.
The inverter’ s electrical thermal
Set 05-01 and 06-13 to 06-15
protection is operating at the
correctly.
wrong level.
An external device has tripped an Remove the cause of the external fault
alarm function and reset the fault.
External Fault EF 47 External Fault Ensure the signal lines have been
Wiring is incorrect. connected properly to the terminals
assigned for external fault detection
1) Check the insulation resistance
Motor insulation is damaged. of the motor.
2) Replace the motor
1) Check the resistance between the
A damaged motor cable is
cable and the ground terminal .
creating a short circuit.
Ground Fault 2) Replace the cable.
A current short to 1) Review the possible solutions
ground exceeded 50% provided for handling noise
ERC_GFF GFF 54 interference.
of rated current on the Inverter fails to operate properly
output side of the due to noise interference. 2) Review the section on handling
inverter. noise interference and check the
control circuit lines, main circuit
lines, and ground wiring.

Hardware problem. Replace the inverter.

The power supply voltage did not


Increase the voltage to within that of
reach the range of the inverter’ s
the specifications.
specifications.
DC Bus Undervoltage:
The DC bus voltage fell The wrong undervoltage detection 1) Set 06-22 correctly.
DCBUS Low Vol. LV 55 below the undervoltage level is set to 06-22.
detection level setting in 1) Cycle power to the inverter and
06-22. The relay or contactor on the
see if the fault reoccurs.
soft-charge bypass circuit is
2) If the problem continues, replace
damaged.
the inverter.
While the inverter was writing
data (especially initializing data or
1) Initialize the function code data.
copying data), power supply was
2) Cycle power to the inverter.
turned OFF and the voltage for
EEPROM Write Error the control circuit dropped.
EEPROM Fault1 CF1 56 Data cannot be written A high intensity noise was given
to the EEPROM to the inverter while data 1) Initialize the function code data
(especially initializing data) was 2) Cycle power to the inverter.
being written.
The control circuit failed. Replace inverter or control board.
While the inverter was writing
data (especially initializing data or
1) Initialize the function code data
copying data), power supply was
2) Cycle power to the inverter
EEPROM Fault2 CF2 57 EEPROM Read Error turned OFF and the voltage for
the control circuit dropped.
The control circuit failed. Replace inverter or control board.
1)
Check for wiring errors in the
Main circuit power input wires
main circuit drive input power.
broken.
Lack of Phase PHL 63 Input phase loss 2) Correct the wiring
There is loose wiring in the Tighten the terminal screws to the
inverter input power terminals recommended torque.

10-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution


Overspeed: 1) Check the setting for the
The motor speed overspeed detection level 10-04
Over Speed OSPD 70 Inappropriate parameter settings.
feedback exceeded the and the overspeed detection time
10-05
10-04 setting.
Parameter adjust Motor wire unconnected 1)check the motor connection wire
Autotunning Fault ATE 71 Motor power and converter unfit 2)select the matching converter
unnomaral
Control mode 00-04 4or8 % 1)change control mode
NO PG Card PGE0 72 NO PG card unseting PG card 2) set PG card

The fan is locked. Clean the fan.


Fan Fault FAN 74 Fan error

The fan is damaged. Replace the cooling fan.


PG error1: PG cable A or B is disconnected. Correct the wiring.
The motor speed
PG Err 1 PGE1 75 feedback is kept zero PG has no power. Check the power line to the PG.
for longer than the time
set to 10-03; PG cable is not wired properly. Rewire the PG.
PG error2: PG has no power. Check the power line to the PG.
No PG pulses are PG cable is disconnected. Correct the wiring.
PG Err 2 PGE2 76
received for longer than
the time set to 10-03. PG cable is not wired properly. Rewire the PG.
PG error3: Rotational direction for the PG set
Make sure motor lines for each phase
The speed reference and to 10-01 is the opposite of the
(U, V, W) are connected properly.
actual motor speed are order of the motor lines.
PG Err 3 PGE3 77
differrent for longer PG has no power. Check the power line to the PG.
than the time set to
10-03. PG cable is disconnected. Correct the wiring.
1) Make sure the PG is properly
PG Z Pulse Fault:
connected.
The motor turned two
PG is not connected, not wired 2) If the problem continues after
PG Z Loss PGZ 78 full rotation without the
properly, or is damaged. cycling power, then replace
PG Z pulse being
either the PG option card or the
detected.
PG itself.
1) Widen 10-07.
2) Length 10-08.
Parameters are not set
3) Check relationship between set
appropriately.
Speed Deviation: data for 05-04 (Motor poles) and
The deviation between 10-00 (encoder pulses).
the speed reference and 1) Measure the output current.
PG Dev. PGD 79 speed feedback is 2) Lower the load.
greater than the setting Overload 3) Check whether the mechanical
in 10-07 for longer than brake is activated.
the time set to 10-08. 4) Release it.
Output speed cannot increase by a
Check data of 06-00
reaction of the current limiter.
Miss-connection of the PG Check the wiring
An optional regenerative
converter or the equivalent is Set 06-04 correctly.
used.
BrakeU Short BF1 80 Braking IGBT error The wrong braking resistor is Make sure the rating of the braking
installed. resistor fits drive and application.

Braking IGBT is damaged Replace inverter.

10-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution


1) Review the possible solutions
provided for handling noise
interference.
Inverter fails to operate properly
2) Review the section on handling
Braking IGBT due to noise interference.
BrakeU Broken BF2 81 noise interference and check the
overcurrent
control circuit lines, main circuit
lines, and ground wiring.
The wrong braking resistor is Make sure the rating of the braking
installed. resistor fits drive and application.
1) Review the possible solutions
provided for handling noise
interference.
Inverter fails to operate properly
2) Review the section on handling
due to noise interference.
noise interference and check the
control circuit lines, main circuit
lines, and ground wiring.
1) Remove the wires connected to
the inverter output terminals (U,
V, and W) and measure the
IGBT OC OCC 82 IGBT error The inverter output terminals interphase resistance of the
were short-circuited. wires. Check if the resistance is
too low.
2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
1) Remove the wires connected to
the inverter output terminals (U,
Ground faults occurred at the V, and W) and perform a Megger
inverter output terminals. test.
2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
1) Remove the wires connected to
the inverter output terminals (U,
V, and W) and measure the
interphase resistance of the
The inverter output terminals wires. Check if the resistance is
were short-circuited. too low.
2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
Fuse error 3) Replace the Inverter after
DC Bus Fuse blown. correcting the fault.
Fuse Fault FF 84
The fuse in the main 1) Remove the wires connected to
circuit is open. the inverter output terminals (U,
V, and W) and perform a Megger
Ground faults occurred at the test.
inverter output terminals. 2) Remove the part that
short-circuited
3) Replace the Inverter after
correcting the fault.
The inverter output terminals are Replace the Inverter after correcting
shorted to P1 or N. the fault.
1) Turn the power off and check the
connection between the control
There is a connection error. board and the power board.
Phase U current 2) If the problem continues, replace
Curr. 1 Err CD1 86
detecting circuit error the inverter.
1) Cycle power to the inverter.
Control circuit is damaged. 2) If the problem continues, replace
the inverter.
1) Turn the power off and check the
connection between the control
Phase W current
Curr. 3 Err CD3 88 There is a connection error. board and the power board.
detecting circuit error.
2) If the problem continues, replace
the inverter.

10-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Display Ab. Code Descriptions Possible Causes Solution


1) Cycle power to the inverter.
Control circuit is damaged. 2) If the problem continues, replace
the inverter.
The input signal range of the AVI
AVI Fault AVIE 90 AVI error exceeds the setting in 06-42 and Check the input signal range.
06-43
The input signal range of the ACI
ACI Fault ACIE 91 ACI error exceeds the setting in 06-44 and Check the input signal range.
06-45.
The input signal range of the AUI
AUI Fault AUIE 92 AUIerror exceeds the setting in 06-46 and Check the input signal range.
06-47.
1) Check the connection between
There is a connection error the temperature sensor and the
between the temperature sensor heatsink.
Temperature sensor
TH1 Err LH1 93 and the heatsink or between sersor 2) Check the connection between
Error
and the circuit or the sensor is the temperature sensor and the
damaged. circuit.
3) Replace the sensor.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
1) Reduce the load when operating
Inverter Overload: at low speeds.
Overload occurred when
Electronic thermal 2) Replace the inverter with a
operating at low speeds.
Invert OL.Warn OL 100 function for inverter model that is one frame size
overload detection was larger.
activated. Lengthen the acceleration and
Accel/No.el ramp is too short.
Deceleration ramp.
Replace the inverter with a larger
Drive capacity is too small.
model.
Load is too heavy. Reduce the load.
1) Check the motor-rated current.
The wrong motor rated current is 2) Enter the value written on the
set to 05-01. motor nameplate to parameter
Motor Overload
05-01
Electronic thermal
1) Check the motor characteristics.
Motor OL.Warn OL1 101 function for motor The characteristics of electronic
2) Correct the type of motor
overload detection was thermal motor protection did not
protection that has been selected
activated. match those of the motor
(06-14).
overload.
3) Install an external thermal relay.
The inverter’ s electrical thermal
Set 05-01 and 06-13 to 06-15
protection is operating at the
correctly.
wrong level.
1) Check the temperature
surrounding the inverter.
2) Improve the air circulation
within the enclosure panel.
Surrounding temperature is too
3) Install a fan or air conditioner to
high.
cool the surrounding area.
4) Remove anything near the
inverter that might be producing
Heatsink overheat: excessive heat.
The temperature of the 1) Set 06-18 to 0,1,2,3;
Internal cooling fan is stopped.
IGBT.Temp Warn OH1 102 heatsink exceeded the 2) Replace the cooling fan.
overheat pre-alarm level 1) Check if there is sufficient
set to 06-16. clearance around the inverter.
2) Increase the clearance.
Air vent is blocked
3) Check if the heat sink is not
clogged.
4) Clean the heat sink.
1) Measure the output current.
2) Lower the carrier frequency
Load is too heavy.
(00-10).
3) Reduce the load.

10-10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

11. Inspection & Maintenance


This chapter describes basic inspection and maintenance for the Inverter.
Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation for a long time. Take care of the
following items during work.
11.1. Inspection & Maintenance Precautions

Turn the power OFF and wait for more than five minutes, before starting inspection. Further, check that the Digital
Operator is unlit, and check the DC link bus voltage between the P2 and N terminals to be lower than 25 VDC.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
Maintenance, inspection, and parts replacement should be made only by qualified persons.
Take off the watch, rings and other metallic matter before starting work.
Use insulated tools.
Otherwise, electric shock or injuries could occur.
If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual, the motor may
rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine.
In the tuning process of the inverter, no motor torque control for braking of the machinery takes effect.Tune the
inverter for the motor after disconnecting it from the machinery, or after mechanically brakes the machinery. Anyway,
do it after suppressing any dangerous factors.
An accident or injuries could occur.

11.2. Daily Inspection


Visually inspect errors in the state of operation from the outside without removing the covers while the inverter
operates or while it is turned ON.
1) Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming from the motor
2) Inspect for abnormal heat generation from the Inverter or motor.
3) Inspect for ambient temperature.
4) Inspect for inverter cooling fan operation.
11.3. Periodic Inspection
Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Tab 11-1 outlines
the recommended periodic inspections. Periodic inspections should generally be performed once a year. Operating and
environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the actual inspection frequency for
each installation.
Before performing periodic inspection, be sure to stop the motor, turn OFF the inverter, and shut down power
supply. Then remove the covers of the control and main circuit terminal blocks.
Tab 11-1 Periodic Inspection Checklist
Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria
1) Check the ambient temperature, 1) The standard
humidity, vibration and atmosphere (dust, specification must be
1) Check visually or measure
gas, oil mist, or water drops). satisfied.
Environment using apparatus.
2) Check if tools or other foreign matter 2) No foreign or
2) Visual inspection
or dangerous objects are left around the Dangerous objects are
equipment. left.
The standard
Check if the voltages of the main and Measure the voltages using a
Voltage specification must be
control circuit are correct. multimeter or the like.
satisfied.
1) Abnormal noise and excessive
vibration
1) Visual or hearing
2) Loose screws (tightened parts)
inspection
Structure 3) Deformation and breakage No abnormalities
2) Retighten.
4) Discoloration and deformation caused
3), 4), 5) Visual inspection
by overheat
5) Check for foulness and dust.

11-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria


1) Check if bolts and screws are tight and
not missing.
2) Check the devices and insulators for
1) Retighten.
Common deformation, cracks, breakage and No abnormalities
2), 3) Visual inspection
discoloration caused by overheat and
deterioration.
3) Check for foulness and dust.
1) Check the conductor for discoloration
Conductor
and distortion caused by overheat. Visual inspection No abnormalities
and wire
2) Check the sheath of the cable
Main
Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, Visual inspection and
circuit Terminals No abnormalities
or loose connections. Retighten
1) Check for electrolyte leakage,
discoloration, cracks and swelling of the
1),2) Visual inspection
DC bus case. 1),2) No abnormalities
3) Measure discharge time
capacitor 2) Check if the safety valve does not
with capacitance probe.
protrude remarkably.
3) Measure the capacitance if necessary.
Magnetic
1) Check for chatters during operation. 1) Hearing inspection
contactor No abnormalities
2) Check for rough contacts. 2) Visual inspection
and relay
1) Check for loose screws and connectors.
2) Check for odor and discoloration. 1) Retighten.
Control Printed 3) Check for cracks, breakage, 2) Smelling and visual
No abnormalities
circuit circuit board deformation and remarkable rust. inspection
4) Check the capacitors for electrolyte 3), 4) Visual inspection
leaks and deformation.
1) Hearing and visual
1) Check for abnormal noise and
inspection, or turn manually
excessive vibration.
(be sure to turn the power
Cooling fan 2) Check for loose bolts. No abnormalities
Cooling OFF).
3) Check for discoloration caused by
System 2) Retighten.
overheats.
3) Visual inspection
Ventilation Check the heat sink, intake and exhaust
Visual inspection No abnormalities
path ports for clogging and foreign matter.
11.4. Periodic Maintenance
In order to keeps the Inverter operating normally over a long time, and to prevent down time due to an unexpected
failure, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life. Each part of the
product has its own service life that will vary according to the environmental and operating conditions. It is
recommended that the following parts be replaced as specified in Tab 11-2.
For replacement parts, contact the distributor where the inverter was purchased or contact GIE directly.
Tab 11-2 Part Replacement Guidelines
Part Standard Replacement Period
DC bus capacitor 8 years
Cooling fan(s) 8 years
The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions:
Ambient temperature: 45 )
Load factor: 80%
Operating rate: 6 hours per day

11-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

12. Specifications
12.1. Three-Phase 380 V Class
Item Specification
Model
0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0185 0220 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750 0900
EFC-B-4-BBBB-A
Maximum Applicable Motor
3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Capacity (kW)
Maximum Applicable Motor
5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 120
Capacity (HP)
Rated Output
8.5 13 18 25 32 38 45 60 73 91 110 150 176
Current (A) * *1 +
Rated Output
6 9 12 16 21 25 30 39 48 60 72 99 118
Capacity (kVA) * *2 +
Output
Carrier Frequency
10 6 4
 kHz 
Maximum Output
Three-phase 380 to 480 V proportional to input voltage)
Voltage (V)
Input Current (A) 10.4 14.6 21 30 30 36 43 59 74 90 110 149 170
Rated Voltage,
Three-phase 380~480V % 50/60HZ
Rated Frequency
Input Allowable Voltage
-15%~+10%  323~528V 
Fluctuation
Allowable
Frequency -5%~+5%  47~63 Hz 
Fluctuation
Cooling Method Fan cooling
Mass (kg) 3.5 3.5 3.5 18 18 28 28 38 38
(*1) Ambient temperature: less than 45°C, RMS output current of the inverter: 80% of the rated output current.
(*2)Rated capacity is calculated by assuming the output rated voltage as 380 V.

12-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

12.2. Common Specifications


Item Specification
Control Method Closed Loop FOC For PM or IM;
Speed Control
1:1000 with PG
Range
Speed Control
±0.05% witn PG card
Accuracy
Frequency Control
0~399.98 Hz
Range
Control Frequency
Digital Input ±0.05%
Characteristics Accuracy
Frequency Setting
Outside terminal set; Analog Input; Digital Operator;
Method
Frequency Setting Digital Inputs:±0.01HZ;
Resolution Analog Inputs:1/1000 of The Maximum Output Speed Setting (10bit))
Start/Stop Digital Operator; Terminal Command:

Accel./No.al Ramp. 0.01~60.00s And S Curve


1) 7-Way Multi-Function Digital Input, FWD/REV, ENA.
2) Multi-Function Digital Input Settings: 1. Multi-Step Speed Reference, 2.
Inspection Operation; 3 External Fault; 4 Fault Reset; 5 Battery Operation;
6 Weighing signal;
Control Input 3) Sink or Source;
4) The Input Signal Level May Be Active On or Active Off.
5) 3-Way Analog Input: 0~10V, -10V~+10V, 0~20mA/0~10V
6) Multi-Function Analog Input Setting: 1.Frequency Reference,
0~10V/0~20mA(0 ~ Maximum Output Frequency(01-01)); 2.Starting
Torque Compensation
1) 2-Way RELAY Output.
2) 2-Way OC Output.
General
3) The Out Signal Level May Be Active On or Active Off.
Functions
4) Multi-Function Digital Out Setting: 1: During Run Indicate; 2: Frequency
Control Output
Agreement Indicate; 3: Frequency Agreement Indicate 2; 4: Fault Indicate;
5: Control Signal Of Brake; 6: Control Signal Of Contactor On The Output
Side; 7: Warn Indicate; 8: Ouput Current Under Level Indicate; 9: Control
Signal Of Contactor On The Input Side.
5) 1-Way Multi-Function Analog Output  0~10V Or 0~20mA ,
ENA External Enable Function
Password Function Input The Correct Password To Enable Changing Parameters.
Cumulative
Displays The Cumulative Operation Time Of The Motor And The Inverter
Operation Time
Cooling Fan Operation Selection; Displays The Cumulative Operation Time Of The Fan.
1) RS485, RJ11inerface And Terminal Interface.
2) Communication Speeds Available(4.8k-115.2kbps), Protocol(RTU, 8, N,2)
Communication Modbus
3) Observe Drive Status And Drive Control Terminal Status; Read And Write
Parameters, Set And Reset Faults, Set Multi-Function Inputs.

Theree phases (A B Z ) % complementary or Oper-collector input % +12V %


PG-CA41
Oper-collector output




A+ A B+ B- Z+ Z- % Line driver input % +5V % Oper-collector output or


PG-LA41
Line driver output








A+ A- B+ B- C+ C- D+ D- R+ R-;SIN/COS differential input;


Encoder PG-SA41
fit to ERN1387 encoder,+5v, Oper-collector output or Line driver output




R1 R2 S1 S2 S3 S4 rotary transformer signal and KTY/PTC temperature


PG_RA41

sensor signal input Oper-collector output or Line driver output








A+ A- B+ B- CLK+ CLK- DATA+ DATA- differential input % fit to


PG_EA41
ECN1313 encoder % +5V % Oper-collector output or Line driver output
Able to run with 15 steps speed, s-curve time can be set by 6 independent
Lift Functins S Curve
parameters.
Speed Unit Hz % rpm % m/s % m/min
Inspection Using Multi-Function Digital Input, Independent Accel./No.al Ramp, 3 Speeds
Operation With Multi-Step Speed Input.

12-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Item Specification
Using Multi-Function Digital Input, Independent Speed Parameter, AC 380V
Battery Operation
Single Phase Or DC 440V.
Weight Setting Weight Setting Using Analog Input.
Torque
1) Weight source can be from communication or analog input.
Compensation At
2) Torque compensation @Start can be realized by autoloading adjustment.
Start
Dwell Speed and Time Can Be Set.
Magnetic Pole
Stationary Auto-Tuning Without Taking Off Rope.
Position Detection
Auto-Tuning Both PM and IM have Stationary Auto-Tuning and Rotational Auto-Tuning.
Without Torque Compensation: Released By Time Delay
Brake Sequence With Torque Compensation: Auto Released
Brake Closed: Time Delay At Normal(No Delay At Fault Or DENA)
Magnetic Contactor
Controlled By Time Delay.
Sequence
Motor Overload Electronic Thermal Overload Relay
Overcurrent Drive Stops When Output Current Exceeds 240% Of Rated Output Current
Ground Leakage
Higher Than 50% *Rated Current
Current Protection
Output Short Circuit Electronic Circuit Protection
Overload Protection 60 S At 150% Of Rated Output Current, 10s @ 200% Of Rated Output Current
Overvoltage 380Vclass: Parameters Setting, Vdc>820 V;
Protection
Undervoltage 380Vclass: Parameters Setting, Vdc<400 V;
Protection
Overspeed
Parameters Setting,
Protection
Protection
Speed Deviation
Functions Parameters Setting,
Protection
Heatsink Overheat
Thermistor
Protection
brake IGBT short and over current protection
Brake module break
Braking IGBT
Electronic Circuit Protection
Failed
Others Input Phase Loss, Fan Lock, Encoder Failed And So On.

. Different protect ,different reset , such as auto reset manual reset and power
Protection process
loss reset
Fault Record Displays The First To The Sixrth Most Recent Faults. Displays The Fault Trace
At The Previous Fault
Protection Class IP20
Ambient
-10  ~+45 
Temperature
Humidity 5%~95% (No Condensation)
Altitude 1000 m or Lower
Keep From Dust, Direct Sunlight, Corrosive Gases, Flammable Gas, Oil Mist,
Surrounding Area
Vapor Or Water Drops
Environment Storage
-25  ~+60 
Temperature
Storage Humidity 5%~95% (No Condensation)
Transportation
-25~+70 
Temperature
Transportation
Humidity 5%~95% (No Condensation)

Vibration 10Hz f 150Hz 10m/s2

12-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

13. Control Diagram


13.1. Objective Speed Reference

13-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

13.2. Speed Loop

13-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

13.3. Speed Reference

13-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14. Appendix
14.1. Inverter Capacity
00-00 displays the identity code of the inverter. The capacity, rated current, rated voltage and the carrier frequency
relate to the identity code. Users can use the following table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and carrier
frequency of inverter correspond to the identity code. 00-01 displays the rated current of the inverter. By reading this
parameter the user can check if the inverter is correct.
Tab 14-1 Inverter Capacity
Item Specification
Model
0037 0055 0075 0110 0150 0185 0220 0300 0370 0450 0550 0750 0900
EFC-B-4-BBBB-A
Model Code 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
Maximum
Applicable Motor 3.7 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90
Capacity (kW)
Maximum
Applicable Motor 5 7.5 10 15 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 120
Capacity (HP)
Rated
Output
8.5 13 18 25 32 38 45 60 73 91 110 150 176
Current
(A)
Rated
Output
6 9 12 16 21 25 30 39 48 60 72 99 118
Capacity
Output (kVA)
Carrier
Frequency 10 6 4
 kHz 
Maximum
Output
Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage)
Voltage
(V)

14-1
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.2. Motor Code


When GIE motors are used, set the motor code for the motor being used. Depending on the motor code entered,
the drive automatically sets several parameters to appropriate values. The motor code setting is explained as
following.
0 0 0 0
3. Motor type number
2. Motor series type
1. Motor species

1 - Motor species:
0 . PM
1 . IM
2 - Motor series type
for PM:
0 . GSD-SM
1 . GSD-MM1
2 . GSD-MM
3 . GRL-MM
4 . GSC-ML
5 . GSC-LL
6 . GSS-SM
7 . GSS-MM
8 . GSS-lM
for IM:
0 . GM-185
1 . GL-200
2 . UYS
3 . UYF
4 . UKL
Please refer to the <Motor Category> for more details of Motor Type Number. If a different motor other than
GIE’s series listed former is used, then [05-10] should be set to FFFF.
For PM, the parameters would be set automatically include:
01-01 - 05-01 - 05-03 - 05-04 - 05-05 - 05-06 - 05-08 - 05-09 - 05-18 - 05-19 - 07-01 - 07-02 - 10-00 - 10-11 -
10-12 - 10-13 - 10-14 - 10-18.
For PM, the parameters would be set automatically include:
01-01 - 05-01 - 05-03 - 05-04 - 05-11 - 05-31 - 05-32 - 05-33 - 05-34 - 05-35 - 07-01 - 07-02 - 10-00 - 10-11 -
10-12 - 10-13 - 10-14 - 10-18.

14-2
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.3. Moter Category


GSD-SM series
Motor Code 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 0.5 0.63 0.75 1
Load kg 320 320 320 320 450 450 450 450 550 550 550 550
Power kW 1.1 1.4 1.6 2.2 1.5 1.9 2.3 3 1.9 2.3 2.8 3.7
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 230 290 220 290 230 290 220 290

GSD-MM1 series
Motor Code 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5
Load kg 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 750 750 750 750 750
Power kW 2.1 2.7 3.2 4.2 6.3 6.8 7.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.7 7.2
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250
Motor Code 010C 010D 010E 010F 0110 0111 0112 0113 0114 0115 0116 0117
Speed m/s 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75
Load kg 750 750 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 900 900 900
Power kW 7.6 8.3 2.5 3.2 3.8 5 7.6 8.1 8.8 2.9 3.6 4.3
Voltage V 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220
Motor Code 0118 0119 011A 011B 011C 011D 011E 011F 0120 0121 0122 -
Speed m/s 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 -
Load kg 900 900 900 900 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 -
Power kW 5.6 8.5 9.2 10.0 3.1 3.9 4.7 6.2 9.4 10 11.0 -
Voltage V 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 -

GSD-MM series
Motor Code 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 - - - - -
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 - - - - -
Load kg 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 - - - - -
Power kW 3.8 4.8 5.7 7.5 11.3 12 13.2 - - - - -
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 - - - - -

GRL-MM series
Motor Code 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 030A 030B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5
Load kg 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 750 750 750 750 750
Power kW 2.1 2.7 3.2 4.2 6.3 6.8 7.4 2.4 3 3.6 4.7 7.2
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250
Motor Code 030C 030D 030E 030F 0310 0311 0312 0313 0314 0315 0316 0317
Speed m/s 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75
Load kg 750 750 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 900 900 900
Power kW 7.6 8.3 2.5 3.2 3.8 5 7.6 8.1 8.8 2.9 3.6 4.3
Voltage V 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220
Motor Code 0318 0319 031A 031B 031C 031D 031E 031F 0320 0321 0322 0323
Speed m/s 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5
Load kg 900 900 900 900 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1150
Power kW 5.6 8.5 9.2 10.0 3.1 3.9 4.7 6.2 9.4 10 11.0 3.8
Voltage V 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230
Motor Code 0324 0325 0326 0327 0328 0329 - - - - - -
Speed m/s 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 - - - - - -
Load kg 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 - - - - - -
Power kW 4.8 5.7 7.5 11.3 12 13.2 - - - - - -
Voltage V 290 220 290 250 260 290 - - - - - -

14-3
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

GSC-ML series
Motor Code 0400 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 0409 - -
Speed m/s 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 - -
Load kg 750 750 800 800 900 900 1000 1000 1150 1150 - -
Power kW 9.8 12.2 10.4 13 11.8 14.7 13.1 16.4 15.2 19.0 - -
Voltage V 235 290 235 290 235 290 235 290 235 290 - -

GSC-LL series
Motor Code 0500 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 050A 050B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 2 2.5 0.5 0.63 0.75
Load kg 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1600 1600 1600
Power kW 4.6 5.8 7 9.3 13.5 14.5 16 18.3 23 5.6 6.9 8.3
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 235 290 230 290 220
Motor Code 050C 050D 050E 050F 0510 0511 0512 0513 0514 0515 0516 0517
Speed m/s 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 2 2.5 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6
Load kg 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
Power kW 11 16 17.2 19 21.6 27 6.8 8.6 10.2 13.6 20.4 21.8
Voltage V 290 250 260 290 235 290 230 290 220 290 250 260
Motor Code 0518 0519 051A - - - - - - - - -
Speed m/s 1.75 2 2.5 - - - - - - - - -
Load kg 2000 2000 2000 - - - - - - - - -
Power kW 23.8 27.2 34.0 - - - - - - - - -
Voltage V 290 235 290 - - - - - - - - -

GSS-SM series
Motor Code 0600 0601 0602 0603 0604 0605 0606 0607 0608 0609 060A 060B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5
Load kg 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 450 450 450 450 450
Power kW 1.1 1.4 1.6 2.1 3.2 3.4 3.7 1.5 1.9 2.3 3 4.5
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250
Motor Code 060C 060D 060E 060F 0610 0611 0612 0613 0614 0615 616 0617
Speed m/s 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75
Load kg 450 450 550 550 550 550 550 550 550 630 630 630
Power kW 4.8 5.2 1.8 2.3 2.7 3.6 5.4 5.8 6.3 2.1 2.6 3.1
Voltage V 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220
Motor Code 0618 0619 061A 061B - - - - - - - -
Speed m/s 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 - - - - - - - -
Load kg 630 630 630 630 - - - - - - - -
Power kW 4.1 6.2 6.6 7.2 - - - - - - - -
Voltage V 290 250 260 290 - - - - - - - -

GSS-MM series
Motor Code 0700 0701 0702 0703 0704 0705 0706 0707 0708 0709 070A 070B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5
Load kg 750 750 750 750 750 750 750 800 800 800 800 800
Power kW 2.4 3 3.6 4.7 7.2 7.6 8.3 2.5 3.2 3.8 5 7.6
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250
Motor Code 070C 070D 070E 070F 0710 0711 0712 0713 0714 0715 0716 0717
Speed m/s 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75
Load kg 800 800 900 900 900 900 900 900 900 1000 1000 1000
Power kW 8.1 8.8 2.9 3.6 4.3 5.6 8.5 9.2 10 3.1 3.9 4.7
Voltage V 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220
Motor Code 0718 0719 071A 071B 071C 071D 071E 071F 0720 0721 0722 -
Speed m/s 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 -
Load kg 1000 1000 1000 1000 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 1150 -
Power kW 6.2 9.4 10 11 3.8 4.8 5.7 7.5 11.3 12 13.2 -
Voltage V 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 -

14-4
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

GSS-LM series
Motor Code 0800 0801 0802 0803 0804 0805 0806 0807 0808 0809 080A 080B
Speed m/s 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5
Load kg 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1350 1600 1600 1600 1600 1600
Power kW 4.6 5.8 7 9.3 13.5 14.5 16 5.6 6.9 8.3 11 16
Voltage V 230 290 220 290 250 260 290 230 290 220 290 250
Motor Code 080C 080D - - - - - - - - - -
Speed m/s 1.6 1.75 - - - - - - - - - -
Load kg 1600 1600 - - - - - - - - - -
Power kW 17.2 19 - - - - - - - - - -
Voltage V 260 290 - - - - - - - - - -

GM-185 series
Motor Code 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 100A 100B
Speed m/s 0.75 1 0.75 1 1.5 1.75 0.75 1 1.5 1.75 0.75 1
Load kg 550 550 630 630 630 630 750 750 750 750 800 800
Power kW 4.5 5.5 5.5 6.4 9.5 11.0 6.4 7.5 11.0 13.0 6.4 7.5
Voltage V 244 325 244 325 280 325 244 325 280 325 244 325
Motor Code 100C 100D - - - - - - - - - -
Speed m/s 1.5 1.75 - - - - - - - - - -
Load kg 800 800 - - - - - - - - - -
Power kW 11.0 13.0 - - - - - - - - - -
Voltage V 280 325 - - - - - - - - - -

GL-200 series
Motor Code 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 110A 110B
Speed m/s 0.75 1 1.5 1.75 0.75 1 1.5 1.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
Load kg 900 900 900 900 1000 1000 1000 1000 1150 1350 1500 1600
Power kW 7.5 9.5 13.0 15.0 7.5 9.5 13.0 15.0 7.5 9.5 11 11
Voltage V 260 342 248 290 260 342 248 290 250 248 248 248
Motor Code 110C - - - - - - - - - - -
Speed m/s 0.75 - - - - - - - - - - -
Load kg 2000 - - - - - - - - - - -
Power kW 15 - - - - - - - - - - -
Voltage V 278 - - - - - - - - - - -

UYS series
Motor Code 1200 1201 1202 1203 1204 1205 1206 1207 1208 1209 120A 120B
Speed m/s 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 2 2.5 1.5 1.75 2 2.5
Load kg 750 750 800 800 900 900 1000 1000 1150 1150 1150 1150
Power kW 15.0 18.0 15.0 18.0 18.0 22.0 18.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 22.0 24.0
Voltage V 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 310 267 310 310 310
Motor Code 120C 120D 120E 120F 1210 1211 - - - - - -
Speed m/s 1.5 1.75 2 2.5 0.75 1 - - - - - -
Load kg 1350 1350 1350 1350 2500 2500 - - - - - -
Power kW 18.0 22.0 22.0 30.0 18.0 22.0 - - - - - -
Voltage V 267 310 310 310 267 310 - - - - - -

UYF series
Motor Code 1300 1301 1302 1303 1304 1305 1306 1307 1308 1309 130A 130B
Speed m/s 2 2.5 1.5 1.75 2 2.5 1.5 1.75 2 2.5 0.75 1
Load kg 1350 1350 1500 1500 1500 1500 1600 1600 1600 1600 3000 3000
Power kW 22.0 30 18.0 22.0 24.0 30.0 18.0 22.0 24.0 30.0 22.0 30.0
Voltage V 310 310 236 273 310 310 236 273 310 310 236 310

14-5
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

UKL series
Motor Code 1400 1401 1402 1403 1404 1405 1406 1407 1408 - - -
Speed m/s 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 - - -
Load kg 750 800 900 1000 1150 1350 1500 1600 2000 - - -
Power kW 15.0 15.0 18.0 18.0 11.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 18.0 - - -
Voltage V 265 265 310 310 265 265 265 265 310 - - -

14-6
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.4. Parameters that changes with 01-00


The following tables show parameters and default settings that change with the frequency unit selection
01-00.
Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
Sets the maximum output
01-01 0101H Max Output Freq. Hz 60.00* 0.01 399.98 0x1610
frequency
Sets the acceleration time 1 to
01-05 0105H 1st Acc time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 accelerate from 0 Hz to the 0x0212 8.4
maximum output frequency.
Sets the Deceleration time 1 to
01-06 0106H 1st Dec time sec 10.00 0.01 60.00 Decelerate from the maximum 0x0212 8.4
output frequency to 0 Hz.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-23 0117H Multi-Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0001.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-24 0118H Multi-Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0010.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-25 0119H Multi-Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0011.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-26 011AH Multi-Speed 4 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0100.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-27 011BH Multi-Speed 5 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0101.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-28 011CH Multi-Speed 6 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0110.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-29 011DH Multi-Speed 7 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 0111.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-30 011EH Multi-Speed 8 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1000.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-31 011FH Multi-Speed 9 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1001.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-32 0120H Multi-Speed 10 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1010.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-33 0121H Multi-Speed 11 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1011.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-34 0122H Multi-Speed 12 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1100.
Sets the frequency reference when
01-35 0123H Multi-Speed 13 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 multi-step speed reference 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function

14-7
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

Parameter
Description Unit Default Min Max Setting Att Ref
No. Addr.
input is 1101.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-36 0124H Multi-Speed 14 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1110.
Sets the frequency reference when
multi-step speed reference
01-37 0125H Multi-Speed 15 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.8
command from multi-function
input is 1111.
Sets the desired frequency
02-19 0213H DESIRE-FREQ1 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
agreement detection level 1.
DESIRE-FREQ1 Sets the frequency agreement
02-20 0214H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND detection band for level 1.
Sets the desired frequency
02-21 0215H DESIRE-FREQ2 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
agreement detection level 2.
DESIRE-FREQ2 Sets the frequency agreement
02-22 0216H Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.9
BND detection band for level 2.
Sets the speed level at which the
DC injection/zero speed operation 8.1
07-07 0707H DCI Freq. at stop Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612
starts during stop. The DC injection 8.2
at stop starts from 07-07.
8.1
07-09 0709H Dwell Freq at start Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 Sets the dwell frequency at start. 0x1612
8.2
Sets the frequency reference 1 of
07-19 0713H Inspect Speed 1 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 2 of
07-20 0714H Inspect Speed 2 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the frequency reference 3 of
07-21 0715H Inspect Speed 3 Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1612 8.2
inspection operation.
Sets the leveling frequency 8.1
07-22 0716H Level Speed Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 0x1612
reference. 8.4
Sets the frequency reference at
07-38 0726H Speed @Battery Op Hz 5.00 0 399.98 0x1612 8.6
battery operation.
10-15 0A0FH ASR Switch Freq1 Hz 0.20 0.00 399.98 ASR 1/ASR2 switch frequency 1 0x1612 8.5
10-16 0A10H ASR Switch Freq2 Hz 1.00 0.01 399.98 ASR 1/ASR2 switch frequency 2 0x1612 8.5
11-01 0B01H Rated Output Freq. Hz 50.00 0.01 399.98 Rated Output Frequency 0x1610
11-03 0B03H Mid Output Freq. 1 Hz 10.00 0.00 399.98 Middle Output Frequency 1 0x1610
11-05 0B05H Mid Output Freq. 2 Hz 2.00 0.00 399.98 Middle Output Frequency 2 0x1610
11-07 0B07H Min Output Freq. Hz 0.50 0.00 399.98 Minimum Output Frequency 0x1610
Frequency reference when most
12-07 0C07H Ref freq at fault Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
recent fault occurs.
Output frequency when most recent
12-08 0C08H Output freq at fault Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
fault occurs.
Motor speed when most recent
12-09 0C09H Motor speed at fault Hz 0.00 0.00 399.98 0x1608
fault occurs.
The figure below shows how the value changes with 01-00.For example, the parameter value should be multiplied by A when 01-00
changes from 0 to 1.

14-8
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

F? .>-./ .80
1' ?*
@>@ %?*
-. ..0C ?*
?4.
$?* ...=-./ 0=-.: . 0,>* =-.: . 0,

F=? >F
=
?>
%= % %=? >%
=
?>
$ =
?>
$= = $=? >$

1'
DE
-. ..0C. =
F

F=
=
1' 1'
@ @>
-. ..0C -. ..0C

14-9
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.5. Parameters that changes with 00-00

Three-Phase 380~480V Class


No. Description Unit Condition Value
Model type of
00-00 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35
Drive
00-01 Rated Current Amp 8.50 13.00 18.00 25.00 32.00 38.00 45.00 60.00 73.0091.00110.00 150.00 176.00
00-10Carry Frequency kHz 10 6 4
01-05 1st Acc time sec 10.00 60.00
01-06 1st Dec time sec 10.00 60.00
00-04=1/4 - - 0x1003 0x100A0x10080x110A0x12010x120B 0x1309
05-10 Motor Code -
00-04=8 0x00080x01110x011F 0x0114 0x0122 0x0515 0x0506 0x0508 0x0511

14-10
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.6. Parameters that changes with 05-10


No. Description Unit Value
GSD-SM
05-10 Motor Code - 0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H 0009H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 16.70 21.00
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 3.60 3.60 5.70 5.70 5.00 5.00 8.00 8.00 6.00 6.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 60 76 90 120 60 76 90 120 60 76
05-04 Motor Poles 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 310 320 320
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 1.25 1.25 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 109.8 138.0 106.3 141.0 109.8 138.0 106.3 141.0 108.2 136.3
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 3.773 3.773 1.477 1.477 3.773 3.773 1.477 1.477 2.933 2.933
05-08 Motor Ld mH 75.0 75.0 31.0 31.0 75.0 75.0 31.0 31.0 62.0 62.0
05-09 Motor Lq mH 83.0 83.0 34.5 34.5 83.0 83.0 34.5 34.5 68.5 68.5
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 253.0 253.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-SM GSD-MM1
05-10 Motor Code - 000AH 000BH 0100H 0101H 0102H 0103H 0104H 0105H 0106H 0107H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 25.10 33.60 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 9.50 9.50 7.00 7.00 10.80 10.80 18.50 18.50 18.50 7.70
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 90 120 48 60 72 96 144 154 168 48
05-04 Motor Poles 32 32 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 320 320 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 1.25 1.25 6.00 6.00 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 109.4 141.0 108.0 137.0 109.0 145.0 124.0 132.0 145.0 108.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 1.273 1.273 1.665 1.665 0.816 0.816 0.320 0.320 0.320 1.665
05-08 Motor Ld mH 28.0 31.0 33.5 33.5 26.6 26.6 8.2 8.2 8.2 33.5
05-09 Motor Lq mH 31.1 34.0 37.4 37.4 31.8 31.8 7.1 7.1 7.1 37.4
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 253.0 253.0 240.0 240.0 246.0 246.0 153.0 153.0 153.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM1
05-10 Motor Code - 0108H 0109H 010AH 010BH 010CH 010DH 010EH 010FH 0110H 0111H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 7.70 12.00 12.00 20.80 20.80 20.80 8.20 8.20 12.80 12.80
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 60 72 96 144 154 168 48 60 72 96
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 5.0 5.0 50.0 50.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 10.0 10.0 100.0 100.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.00 6.00 6.60 6.60
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 137.0 109.0 145.0 124.0 132.0 145.0 108.0 137.0 109.0 145.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 1.665 0.816 0.816 0.320 0.320 0.320 1.665 1.665 0.816 0.816

14-11
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM1
05-08 Motor Ld mH 33.5 26.6 26.6 8.2 8.2 8.2 33.5 33.5 26.6 26.6
05-09 Motor Lq mH 37.4 31.8 31.8 7.1 7.1 7.1 37.4 37.4 31.8 31.8
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 246.0 246.0 153.0 153.0 153.0 240.0 240.0 246.0 246.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.002 0.002

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM1
05-10 Motor Code - 0112H 0113H 0114H 0115H 0116H 0117H 0118H 0119H 011AH 011BH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 22.00 22.00 22.00 9.70 9.70 14.50 14.50 25.00 25.00 25.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 144 154 168 48 60 72 96 144 154 168
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 50.0 50.0 50.0 5.0 5.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 100.0 100.0 100.0 10.0 10.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.00 6.00 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 124.0 132.0 145.0 108.0 137.0 109.0 145.0 124.0 132.0 145.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.320 0.320 0.320 1.665 1.665 0.816 0.816 0.320 0.320 0.320
05-08 Motor Ld mH 8.2 8.2 8.2 33.5 33.5 26.6 26.6 8.2 8.2 8.2
05-09 Motor Lq mH 7.1 7.1 7.1 37.4 37.4 31.8 31.8 7.1 7.1 7.1
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 153.0 153.0 153.0 240.0 240.0 190.0 190.0 153.0 153.0 153.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.003 0.003 0.002 0.002 0.002

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM1 GSD-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 011CH 011DH 011EH 011FH 0120H 0121H 0122H 0200H 0201H 0202H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 10.50 10.50 16.10 16.10 27.50 27.50 27.50 12.00 12.00 18.50
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 48 60 72 96 144 154 168 48 60 72
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.60 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 108.0 137.0 109.0 145.0 124.0 132.0 145.0 113.1 142.4 111.5
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 1.665 1.665 0.816 0.816 0.320 0.320 0.320 1.270 1.270 0.119
05-08 Motor Ld mH 33.5 33.5 26.6 26.6 8.2 8.2 8.2 27.2 27.2 11.9
05-09 Motor Lq mH 37.4 37.4 31.8 31.8 7.1 7.1 7.1 30.2 30.2 13.2
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 190.0 190.0 153.0 153.0 153.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.003 0.003 0.002 0.002 0.002 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM GRL-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 0203H 0204H 0205H 0206H 0300H 0301H 0302H 0303H 0304H 0305H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 18.50 31.50 31.50 31.50 7.00 7.00 10.50 10.50 17.50 17.50
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 96 144 154 168 48 60 72 96 144 154
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060

14-12
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSD-MM GRL-MM
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 148.7 129.6 137.7 150.6 113.1 142.4 111.5 148.7 129.6 137.7
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.561 0.179 0.179 0.179 1.270 1.270 0.561 0.561 0.179 0.179
05-08 Motor Ld mH 11.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 27.2 27.2 11.9 11.9 3.9 3.9
05-09 Motor Lq mH 13.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 30.2 30.2 13.2 13.2 4.4 4.4
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GRL-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 0306H 0307H 0308H 0309H 030AH 030BH 030CH 030DH 030EH 030FH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 17.50 7.70 7.70 11.80 11.80 19.60 19.60 19.60 8.20 8.20
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 168 48 60 72 96 144 154 168 48 60
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 150.6 113.1 142.4 111.5 148.7 129.6 137.7 150.6 113.1 142.4
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.179 1.270 1.270 0.561 0.561 0.179 0.179 0.179 1.270 1.270
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.9 27.2 27.2 11.9 11.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 27.2 27.2
05-09 Motor Lq mH 4.4 30.2 30.2 13.2 13.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 30.2 30.2
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GRL-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 0310H 0311H 0312H 0313H 0314H 0315H 0316H 0317H 0318H 0319H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 12.50 12.50 20.80 20.80 20.80 9.30 9.30 14.00 14.00 23.60
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 72 96 144 154 168 48 60 72 96 144
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 111.5 148.7 129.6 137.7 150.6 113.1 142.4 111.5 148.7 129.6
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.561 0.561 0.179 0.179 0.179 1.270 1.270 0.561 0.561 0.179
05-08 Motor Ld mH 11.9 11.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 27.2 27.2 11.9 11.9 3.9
05-09 Motor Lq mH 13.2 13.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 30.2 30.2 13.2 13.2 4.4
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GRL-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 031AH 031BH 031CH 031DH 031EH 031FH 0320H 0321H 0322H 0323H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 53.45 58.80 16.70 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 16.70
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 23.60 23.60 10.00 10.00 15.50 15.50 26.00 26.00 26.00 12.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 154 168 48 60 72 96 144 154 168 48
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

14-13
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GRL-MM
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 137.7 150.6 113.1 142.4 111.5 148.7 129.6 137.7 150.6 113.1
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.179 0.179 1.270 1.270 0.561 0.561 0.179 0.179 0.179 1.270
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.9 3.9 27.2 27.2 11.9 11.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 27.2
05-09 Motor Lq mH 4.4 4.4 30.2 30.2 13.2 13.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 30.2
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GRL-MM GSC-ML
05-10 Motor Code - 0324H 0325H 0326H 0327H 0328H 0329H 0400H 0401H 0402H 0403H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 21.00 25.10 33.60 50.09 53.45 58.80 48.62 60.90 48.62 60.90
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 12.00 18.50 18.50 31.50 31.50 31.50 29.70 29.70 31.60 31.60
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 60 72 96 144 154 168 139 174 139 174
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 550 550 550 550
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 6000 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 142.4 111.5 148.7 129.6 137.7 150.6 118.7 148.5 118.7 148.5
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 1.270 0.561 0.561 0.179 0.179 0.179 0.096 0.096 0.096 0.096
05-08 Motor Ld mH 27.2 11.9 11.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8
05-09 Motor Lq mH 30.2 13.2 13.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSC-ML GSC-LL
05-10 Motor Code - 0404H 0405H 0406H 0407H 0408H 0409H 0500H 0501H 0502H 0503H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 48.62 60.90 48.62 60.90 48.62 60.90 13.34 16.80 20.06 26.78
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 35.60 35.60 39.50 39.50 45.50 45.50 15.00 15.00 23.00 23.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 139 174 139 174 139 174 39 49 58 77
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 550 550 550 550 550 550 500 500 500 500
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 118.7 148.5 118.7 148.5 118.7 148.5 103.5 130.0 103.1 136.9
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.096 0.096 0.096 0.096 0.096 0.096 1.686 1.686 0.676 0.676
05-08 Motor Ld mH 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 2.8 39.5 39.5 17.7 17.7
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 43.9 43.9 19.7 19.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

14-14
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSC-LL
05-10 Motor Code - 0504H 0505H 0506H 0507H 0508H 0509H 050AH 050BH 050CH 050DH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 40.11 42.74 46.83 53.45 66.89 13.34 16.80 20.06 26.78 40.11
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 40.50 40.50 40.50 56.00 56.00 17.50 17.50 27.50 27.50 48.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 115 123 134 153 191 39 49 58 77 115
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 120.4 128.8 140.3 114.6 143.1 103.5 130.0 103.1 136.9 120.4
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.242 0.242 0.242 0.142 0.142 1.686 1.686 0.676 0.676 0.242
05-08 Motor Ld mH 6.1 6.1 6.1 3.2 3.2 39.5 39.5 17.7 17.7 6.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 6.8 6.8 6.8 3.5 3.5 43.9 43.9 19.7 19.7 6.8
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSC-LL
05-10 Motor Code - 050EH 050FH 0510H 0511H 0512H 0513H 0514H 0515H 0516H 0517H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 42.74 46.83 53.45 66.89 13.34 16.80 20.06 26.78 40.11 42.74
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 48.00 48.00 66.50 66.50 21.50 21.50 34.00 34.00 61.00 61.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 123 134 153 191 39 49 58 77 115 123
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 128.8 140.3 114.6 143.1 103.5 130.0 103.1 136.9 120.4 128.8
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.242 0.242 0.142 0.142 1.686 1.686 0.676 0.676 0.242 0.242
05-08 Motor Ld mH 6.1 6.1 3.2 3.2 39.5 39.5 17.7 17.7 6.1 6.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 6.8 6.8 3.5 3.5 43.9 43.9 19.7 19.7 6.8 6.8
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSC-LL GSS-SM
05-10 Motor Code - 0518H 0519H 051AH 0600H 0601H 0602H 0603H 0604H 0605H 0606H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 46.83 53.45 66.89 13.97 17.54 20.90 27.83 41.79 44.52 48.72
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 61.00 85.00 85.00 3.60 3.60 5.60 5.60 9.20 9.20 9.20
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 134 153 191 80 101 120 160 234 255 279
05-04 Motor Poles 40 40 40 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 140.3 114.6 143.1 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.241 0.142 0.142 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166
05-08 Motor Ld mH 6.1 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1

14-15
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSC-LL GSS-SM
05-09 Motor Lq mH 6.8 3.5 3.5 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-SM
05-10 Motor Code - 0607H 0608H 0609H 060AH 060BH 060CH 060DH 060EH 060FH 0610H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 139.7 175.4 209.0 278.3 417.9 445.2 487.2 139.7 175.4 209.0
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 5.00 5.00 7.90 7.90 12.90 12.90 12.90 6.10 6.10 9.60
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 80 101 120 160 234 255 279 80 101 120
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-SM
05-10 Motor Code - 0611H 0612H 0613H 0614H 0615H 0616H 0617H 0618H 0619H 061AH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 27.83 41.79 44.52 48.72 13.97 17.54 20.90 27.83 41.79 44.52
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 9.60 15.70 15.70 15.70 7.00 7.00 11.00 11.00 18.00 18.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 160 234 255 279 80 101 120 160 234 255
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166 0.166
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-SM GSS-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 061BH 0700H 0701H 0702H 0703H 0704H 0705H 0706H 0707H 0708H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 48.72 10.50 13.13 15.65 20.90 31.29 33.39 36.54 10.50 13.13
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 18.00 7.80 7.80 12.20 12.20 20.40 20.40 20.40 8.40 8.40
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 279 60 76 90 120 179 191 209 60 76
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 240 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060

14-16
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-SM GSS-MM
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.166 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 0709H 070AH 070BH 070CH 070DH 070EH 070FH 0710H 0711H 0712H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 15.65 20.90 31.29 33.39 36.54 10.50 13.13 15.65 20.90 31.29
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 13.40 13.40 21.60 21.60 21.60 9.40 9.40 14.50 14.50 24.50
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 90 120 179 191 209 60 76 90 120 179
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-MM
05-10 Motor Code - 0713H 0714H 0715H 0716H 0717H 0718H 0719H 071AH 071BH 071CH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 33.39 36.54 10.50 13.13 15.65 20.90 31.29 33.39 36.54 10.50
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 24.50 24.50 10.20 10.20 16.00 16.00 27.00 27.00 27.00 13.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 191 209 60 76 90 120 179 191 209 60
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320 320
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-MM GSS-LM
05-10 Motor Code - 071DH 071EH 071FH 0720H 0721H 0722H 0800H 0801H 0802H 0803H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 13.13 15.65 20.90 31.29 33.39 36.54 8.40 10.50 12.50 16.70
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 13.00 19.50 19.50 32.00 32.00 32.00 14.80 14.80 22.80 22.80
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 76 90 120 179 191 209 48 61 72 96
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

14-17
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-MM GSS-LM
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 320 320 320 320 320 320 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.167 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
305-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GSS-LM
05-10 Motor Code - 0804H 0805H 0806H 0807H 0808H 0809H 080AH 080BH 080CH 080DH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 25.10 26.78 29.30 8.40 10.50 12.50 16.70 25.10 26.78 29.30
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 37.00 37.00 37.00 17.50 17.50 27.00 27.00 44.00 44.00 44.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 144 153 168 48 61 72 96 144 153 168
05-04 Motor Poles 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400
07-02 Roping ratio 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
10-00 Encoder pulses 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192 8192
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-05 Motor No-Load Vol V 124.0 130.0 147.0 112.0 147.0 107.0 147.0 124.0 130.0 147.0
05-06 Motor Rs ohm 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168 0.168
05-08 Motor Ld mH 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1
05-09 Motor Lq mH 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7 3.7
05-18 MagPolDetect Vcmd V 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0 240.0
05-19 MagPolDetect Time sec 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001

No. Description Unit Value


GM185
05-10 Motor Code - 1000H 1001H 1002H 1003H 1004H 1005H 1006H 1007H 1008H 1009H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 39.38 52.50 39.38 52.50 45.15 52.50 39.38 52.50 45.15 52.50
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 14.00 14.00 17.00 17.00 28.00 28.00 19.80 19.80 31.00 31.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1125 1500 1125 1500 1290 1500 1125 1500 1290 1500
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 38.50 38.50 38.50 38.50 22.67 22.67 38.50 38.50 22.67 22.67
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.551 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.276 0.200 0.430 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.369 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.195 0.200 0.446 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 6.98 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.32 10.00 8.35 10.00 10.00
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 78.8 40.0 40.0 40.0 44.7 40.0 66.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 6.7 4.0 4.0 4.0 3.6 4.0 5.1 4.0 4.0

14-18
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


GM185 GL200
05-10 Motor Code - 100AH 100BH 100CH 100DH 1100H 1101H 1102H 1103H 1104H 1105H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 39.38 52.50 45.15 52.50 42.00 55.65 40.43 44.63 42.00 55.65
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 19.80 19.80 31.00 31.00 22.80 22.80 42.50 42.50 22.80 22.80
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1125 1500 1290 1125 1200 1590 1155 1275 1200 1590
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 38.50 38.50 22.67 22.67 40.00 40.00 20.00 20.00 40.00 40.00
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

No. Description Unit Value


GL200 UYS
05-10 Motor Code - 1106H 1107H 1108H 1109H 110AH 110BH 110CH 1200H 1201H 1202H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 40.43 44.63 40.43 40.43 40.43 40.43 40.43 52.50 52.50 52.50
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 42.50 42.50 28.00 28.70 34.00 34.00 42.50 33.00 44.00 33.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1155 1275 1155 1155 1155 1155 1155 1500 1500 1500
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 710 710 710
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 20.00 28.33 21.75 28.33
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

No. Description Unit Value


UYS
05-10 Motor Code - 1203H 1204H 1205H 1206H 1207H 1208H 1209H 120AH 120BH 120CH
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50 45.15 52.50 52.50 52.50 45.15
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 44.00 41.00 54.00 41.00 54.00 44.00 44.00 49.50 56.50 54.00
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1290 1500 1500 1500 1290
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 21.75 28.33 21.75 28.33 21.75 31.33 31.33 28.33 28.33 31.33
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00

14-19
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


UYS
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

No. Description Unit Value


UYS UYF
05-10 Motor Code - 120DH 120EH 120FH 1210H 1211H 1300H 1301H 1302H 1303H 1304H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 52.50 52.50 52.50 45.45 52.50 39.90 52.50 46.20 52.50 52.50
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 54.00 49.50 71.00 49.50 49.50 49.50 71.00 53.80 53.80 53.80
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1500 1500 1500 1290 1500 114.0 150.0 132.0 150.0 150.0
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 710
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 31.33 28.33 28.33 31.33 28.33 29.00 22.25 29.00 29.00 29.00
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

No. Description Unit Value


UYF UKL
05-10 Motor Code - 1305H 1306H 1307H 1308H 1309H 130AH 130BH 1400H 1401H 1402H
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 52.50 46.20 52.50 52.50 52.50 39.90 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 71.00 53.80 53.80 53.80 71.00 71.00 71.00 41.50 41.50 41.50
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1500 1320 1500 1500 1500 1140 1500 1500 1500 1500
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 710 710 710 710 710 710 710 600 600 600
07-02 Roping ratio 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 29.00 23.25 23.25 23.25
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

No. Description Unit Value


UKL -
05-10 Motor Code - 1403H 1404H 1405H 1406H 1407H 1408H - - - -
01-01 Max Output Freq. Hz 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50 52.50 - - - -
05-01 Motor Rated current Amp 41.00 30.50 36.00 41.40 41.50 41.00 - - - -
05-03 Motor Rated Speed rpm 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 1500 - - - -
05-04 Motor Poles 4 4 4 4 4 4 - - - -
07-01 Diameter of motor mm 600 600 600 600 600 600 - - - -
07-02 Roping ratio 1 2 2 2 2 2 - - - -
10-00 Encoder pulses 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 1024 - - - -
10-11 ASR P Gain 1 % 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 - - - -
10-12 ASR I Gain 1 sec 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 0.060 - - - -
10-13 ASR P Gain 2 % 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 - - - -
10-14 ASR I Gain 2 sec 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 0.030 - - - -

14-20
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

No. Description Unit Value


UKL -
10-18 System Interia kgm2 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 - - - -
05-11 Mech Gear Ratio 23.25 23.25 23.25 23.25 23.25 23.25 - - - -
05-31 IM Rs ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 - - - -
05-32 IM Rr ohm 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 0.200 - - - -
05-33 IM No-Load Current Amp 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 - - - -
05-34 IM Lm mH 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 - - - -
05-35 IM Lx mH 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 - - - -

14-21
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.7. Brake Resistors


The elevator control system is running in four quadrants with potential load and negative torques. Therefore, the
choice of braking components shall be considered in order to avoid over-current and overvoltage trip. The EFC B1
Inverter has built-in braking unit and only needs an external braking resistor. Tab 14-2 for 380V.
Tab 14-2 Braking Resistor Specifications for 380V Inverters
Model Applicable motor rating(kW) Ω)
Allowable minimum resistance(Ω
EFC-B-40037 3.7 88
EFC-B-40055 5.5 58
EFC-B-40075 7.5 42
EFC-B-40110 11 30
EFC-B-40150 15 24
EFC-B-40185 18.5 20
EFC-B-40220 22 17
EFC-B-40300 30 13
EFC-B-40370 37 11
EFC-B-40450 45 9
EFC-B-40550 55 7
EFC-B-40750 75 5
EFC-B-40900 90 4

14-22
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.8. Warranty Agreement

Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the bar code of the equipment
body).During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal
use by following the instruction, our company will be responsible for free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the
following reasons:
a. The damage caused by improper use or repair/modification without prior permission;
b. The damage caused by fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and second disaster;
c. The damage caused by dropping or transportation after the purchase;
d. The damage caused by the improper operation;
e. The damage or failure caused by the trouble out of the equipment (e.g. external device)
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product Warranty
Card in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the newly adjusted Maintenance Price List by our
company.
5. In general, the warranty card will not be re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, please contact the agent of our company or our
company directly.
7. The final explanation of the agreement belongs to GIE.

14-23
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

14.9. Product Warranty Card

Product Warranty Card


Add. Of unit:

Customer
information  Name of unit:

Contact person:
Postalcode:

Tel.:

Product model:

Product Body barcode:


information
Name of agent:

(Maintenance time and content):

Fault
information

14-24
SHANGHAI GIE EFC B1 Instruction Manual

15. Revision History


The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover.
Manual number: G1206016
Date of Publication Revision Number Section Revised Content
July 10 V1.0 - First Edition

15-1
GIE Elevator Frequency Converter B1
Instruction Manual

SHANGHAI GIE EM CO., LTD

! "
# $%"&
 &'(") % % * + $%"&
 &'(") % %& ""
,&- # #. - - /011 - -

Copyright © 2012 Shanghai GIE EM Co., LTD. All Rights Reserved.


G1206016 V1.0 July 10

You might also like